1626LM 5.0B User Provisioning Guide Ed02

Proprietary Use pursuant
Solely
to Company
for authorized
instruction
persons having a need to know
Title page
Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM
1626 Light Manager | Release 5.0B
User Provisioning Guide
3AL-75164-AAAA
ISSUE 2
OCTOBER 2009
Alcatel-Lucent Confidential
Solely for authorized persons having a need to know
Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
Proprietary Use pursuant

Solely
to Company
for authorized
instruction
persons having a need to know
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2009 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside
Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
ot to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2007 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
Contents
About this document

Purpose
......................................................................................................................................................................................... xxv
xxv
Intended audience
..................................................................................................................................................................... xxv
xxv
Supported systems
.................................................................................................................................................................... xxv
xxv
How to use this document
.................................................................................................................................................... xxvi
xxvi
Related documentation ........................................................................................................................................................ xxviii

xxviii
xxviii
Related training ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxviii
Technical support
How to order
.................................................................................................................................................................. xxviii
xxviii
........................................................................................................................................................................... xxviii
xxviii
Quality policy ............................................................................................................................................................................ xxix

xxix
Safety messages
....................................................................................................................................................................... xxix
xxix
How to comment ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxix

xxix
1
Discovering Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Quick Presentation
Introducing Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM ................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Management
Introducing Alcatel-Lucent LM Management ................................................................................................................. 1-3
About the Online Help
1-4
Online Help Scope ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Before You Start With 1626 LM Management

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
iii
Issue 2 October 2009
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Understanding the 1626 LM Management

Quick Overview of 1626 LM Management
..................................................................................................................... 2-2
Craft Terminal Hardware Requirements ............................................................................................................................ 2-3

Software Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-3
2-3
Management Start Up Procedures
2-4
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
Installing the Craft Terminal Application .......................................................................................................................... 2-5
Uninstalling the Craft Terminal Application .................................................................................................................... 2-6
3
Operation Graphical User Interface

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3-1
Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUI
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3-2
The Equipment View Window
The Subrack View Window
.............................................................................................................................................. 3-3
................................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3-5
The Board View Window ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-7

3-7
The Transmission View Window ....................................................................................................................................... 3-15
The Equipment Overview Window
.................................................................................................................................. 3-18
Describing the Permanent Displayed Areas

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-20
3-20
The Title Bar
............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-20
3-20
The Menu Bar
........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-20
3-20
Alarm Severity Indicators
.................................................................................................................................................... 3-26
3-26
Operation Domain Alarm Indicators
................................................................................................................................ 3-28
Management Status Indicators ............................................................................................................................................ 3-29

3-29
Describing and Using the Search for Termination Point Input Windows
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-31
3-31
Search for Termination Point Input Window ................................................................................................................. 3-32

Using the Search for Termination Point Input Window
............................................................................................ 3-32
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
iv
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1626 LM Management Start Up

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4-1
Starting Up with 1626 LM Management
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4-2
Starting the Craft Terminal Application ............................................................................................................................. 4-3
Starting the 1626 LM Supervision ....................................................................................................................................... 4-4
Starting the 1626 LM GUI
..................................................................................................................................................... 4-5
4-5
Managing the Access State

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4-6
Access State Icon Status .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-7
4-7
Setting the Access State to the Craft Terminal Application ........................................................................................ 4-8
Setting the Access State to the 1353 M
5
.......................................................................................................................... 4-9
Software Download Management

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-1
Downloading a Software Package
Activating a Software Package
....................................................................................................................................... 5-2
............................................................................................................................................. 5-4
5-4
Displaying Software Package Information ....................................................................................................................... 5-5

6
Communication Configuration
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6-1
Communication and Routing Management Parameters
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6-2
Common etwork Concepts .................................................................................................................................................. 6-3
6-3
Local Area Addressing Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 6-4
Time Synchronization Parameters
Ethernet Interface Parameters
IP Static Routes Parameters
....................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6-6
............................................................................................................................................... 6-7
6-7
................................................................................................................................................... 6-9
6-9
LAPD Parameters .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-10

6-10
IP Tunnel Parameter
............................................................................................................................................................... 6-11
6-11
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
v
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing Communication and Routing

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-12
6-12
Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters ......................................................................................... 6-13

Setting Up the etwork Manager Address Associated to the 1626 LM .............................................................. 6-14
Identifying a etwork Element as a TP Server ......................................................................................................... 6-15
Disabling A TP from the 1626 LM ................................................................................................................................. 6-16
Forcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 M values
Configuring the Ethernet Interface
.................................................................................. 6-17
................................................................................................................................... 6-18
Configuring IP Static Routes ............................................................................................................................................... 6-19

6-19
Configuring LAPD
................................................................................................................................................................. 6-21
6-21
Managing OSI over IP ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-23

6-23
7
Database Backup and Restore

7-1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
When to Backup and Restore ?
When to Backup? ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7-2
When to Restore? ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7-2
Managing the MIB
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7-3
7-4
Backing Up the MIB ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-4
Restoring the MIB
Deleting the MIB
..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7-5
....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7-7
Racks and Subracks Management

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8-1
Displaying Hardware Views
8-2
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Displaying the General Overview of the 1626 LM Hardware
Displaying the Rack View
.................................................................................. 8-3
...................................................................................................................................................... 8-4
8-4
Displaying the Subrack View
................................................................................................................................................ 8-5
8-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
vi
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Displaying the Board View
.................................................................................................................................................... 8-6
8-6
Managing Racks
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
8-7
Declaring a Rack
........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-8
8-8
Setting a Rack In Service
..................................................................................................................................................... 8-10
8-10
Setting a Rack Out Of Service
............................................................................................................................................ 8-11
8-11
Undeclaring/Removing a Rack
.......................................................................................................................................... 8-12
8-12
Managing Subracks
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-13
8-13
Declaring a Subrack
............................................................................................................................................................... 8-14
8-14
Setting a Subrack In Service
............................................................................................................................................... 8-15
Setting a Subrack Out Of Service ...................................................................................................................................... 8-16

Undeclaring/Removing a Subrack
9
.................................................................................................................................... 8-17
Board and SFP/XFP Module Management

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9-1
About Board Provisioning and Configuration
About the Provisioning Process ............................................................................................................................................ 9-4
About ETHC Configurations ................................................................................................................................................. 9-5
9-5
About TRBD1191 Board
...................................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9-11
Declaring/Undeclaring Boards
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-12
9-12
TRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features

Declaring OCPU Protection Boards
.............................................................................................................. 9-13
................................................................................................................................. 9-19
Declaring Control and Service Boards
............................................................................................................................ 9-20
Declaring TRBD Boards ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-22

9-22
Declaring TRBC boards ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-26
9-26
Declaring OSCU Supervision Boards .............................................................................................................................. 9-29
Declaring BMDX Boards
..................................................................................................................................................... 9-31
9-31
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
vii
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Declaring OMDX Boards ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-33

9-33
Declaring CMDX Boards
..................................................................................................................................................... 9-35
9-35
Declaring the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board

Declaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards
........................................................................................... 9-36
......................................................................................................................... 9-38
Declaring BOFA Amplifier Boards ................................................................................................................................... 9-40

Declaring Ethernet Boards
................................................................................................................................................... 9-42
9-42
Declaring TDMX 1180 boards
........................................................................................................................................... 9-44
9-46
Declaring OADC boards ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-46
Declaring WMA 1100 Boards
.......................................................................................................................................... 9-47
Declaring WMA 3x74 Boards
........................................................................................................................................ 9-49
Undeclaring/Removing Boards
.......................................................................................................................................... 9-51
Board Configuration Parameters

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-53
9-53
Board Generic Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................... 9-53
Board Specific Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................... 9-55
Laser Power Configuration Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 9-62

TRBx Shutdown Criteria
...................................................................................................................................................... 9-64
9-64
LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters
............................................................................................................................. 9-65
LOFA11xx APSD Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 9-68

TDMX and WMA Configuration Parameters
........................................................................................................... 9-69
Configuring Boards
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-73
9-73
Configuring ETHC Working Mode
.................................................................................................................................. 9-74
Managing ETHC Cross Connections
............................................................................................................................... 9-75
Configuring 2xGBE_FC Board Signal Type Transportation

Configuring TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power
Configuring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power
Configuring WMA Laser Power
Configuring TRBx Frequency
.................................................................................. 9-77
...................................................................................................... 9-78
............................................................................................................... 9-79
.................................................................................................................................... 9-80
............................................................................................................................................ 9-81
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
viii
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters
............................................................................................................... 9-82
Configuring TRBx Shutdown Criteria ............................................................................................................................. 9-83

Configuring 40 Gbps TRBC Ethernet Mapping
Configuring LOFA11xx APSD
.......................................................................................................... 9-84
.......................................................................................................................................... 9-85
Configuring Contradirectionality
...................................................................................................................................... 9-86
Configuring the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX Board
................................................................................. 9-87
Configuring ALCT Working Mode ................................................................................................................................... 9-88

Configuring ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism
.......................................................................... 9-90
Configuring TDMX 1180 Port Profile ............................................................................................................................. 9-91

Configuring TDMX 1180 Output Power
........................................................................................................................ 9-92
Configuring WMA Provisioning Parameters
............................................................................................................ 9-93
Configuring WMA 1100 Equalization Parameter .................................................................................................... 9-94

Configuring Channels on WMA 3x74 boards ........................................................................................................... 9-95
Setting Boards In/Out of Service
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-96
9-96
Setting a Board In Service .................................................................................................................................................... 9-97

9-97
Setting a Board Out of Service
........................................................................................................................................... 9-98
Managing SFP/XFP Modules

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-99
9-99
About SFP/XFP Modules and Board Compatibility

Declaring a SFP/XFP Module
................................................................................................ 9-100
.......................................................................................................................................... 9-101
Setting a SFP/XFP Module In Service
.......................................................................................................................... 9-102
Setting a SFP/XFP Module Out of Service
................................................................................................................. 9-103
Undeclaring/Removing SFP/XFP Modules
................................................................................................................ 9-104
Displaying SFP/XFP Module Payload

Changing an SFP or an XFP
.......................................................................................................................... 9-105
............................................................................................................................................. 9-106
Activating Firmware
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-107
9-107
Firmware Activation Displayed Information
.............................................................................................................. 9-107
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
ix
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Activating Firmware
............................................................................................................................................................ 9-108
9-108
Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board Laser

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-109
9-109
Laser Control Parameters ................................................................................................................................................... 9-109
9-109
Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser
......................................................................................... 9-111
Managing External Points

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-113
9-113
About External Points
......................................................................................................................................................... 9-113
9-113
External Points Parameters
................................................................................................................................................ 9-115
9-115
Displaying all External Points
.......................................................................................................................................... 9-116
9-116
Managing External Input Points
...................................................................................................................................... 9-117
Managing External Output Points ................................................................................................................................... 9-118

Filtering External Input Points
......................................................................................................................................... 9-119
Filtering External Output Points ...................................................................................................................................... 9-120

Managing LOFA Upgrade with EMPM1000
9-121
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-121
Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM without OMSP ............................ 9-122
Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM with OMSP
.................................. 9-124
Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM ............................................................................................. 9-126

10
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10-1
About R-OADM and TR-OADM

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10-2
R-OADM and TR-OADM Main characteristics .......................................................................................................... 10-3

Boards Involved in R-OADM and TR-OADM odes
.............................................................................................. 10-5
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Tasks .......................................................................................................... 10-7

R/TR-OADM etwork Procedures/WMA 3x74 Based
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-9
10-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating a Transmission Path
........................................................................................................................................... 10-10
10-10
Deleting a Transmission Path
........................................................................................................................................... 10-13
10-13
R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMA 3x74 Based

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-16
10-16
Performing R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections
Blocking a Channel Connection
...................................................................................................................................... 10-19
Setting an Add & Drop Connection

Setting an Express Connection
.................................................................................. 10-17
............................................................................................................................... 10-20
........................................................................................................................................ 10-23
R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMA 1100 Based

10-26
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-26
R-OADM/WMA 1100 Based Configuration Parameters
Configuring R-OADM with WMA 1100 Boards
11
.................................................................................... 10-27
................................................................................................... 10-28
Transmission Management
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11-1
About Transmission Management Entities

The Main Transmission Management Entities
............................................................................................................. 11-2
About RS-TTI and J0 Configuration

Introducing RS-TTI and J0
.................................................................................................................................................. 11-7
Configuring the RS-TTI/J0
.................................................................................................................................................. 11-9
11-9
About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) Configuration

Introducing Optical TTIs (Trail Trace Identifiers)
Configuring TTIs
.................................................................................................... 11-10
.................................................................................................................................................................. 11-12
11-12
Managing Error Correction

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-14
11-14
Enabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction)
.......................................................................................................... 11-15
Disabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction)
......................................................................................................... 11-16
Modifying the BER (Bit Error Rate) Threshold
........................................................................................................ 11-17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xi
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Cross Connection Management

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12-1
About Cross Connections

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12-2
Cross Connection Types
....................................................................................................................................................... 12-3
12-3
Cross Connections Parameters
........................................................................................................................................... 12-4
12-4
Managing Cross Connections

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-7
12-7
Displaying Cross Connections for a Subrack ................................................................................................................ 12-8

Displaying Cross Connections for a Board .................................................................................................................... 12-9
Creating Cross Connections .............................................................................................................................................. 12-10
12-10
Modifying Cross Connections .......................................................................................................................................... 12-11
12-12
Deleting Cross Connections .............................................................................................................................................. 12-12
13
Connector and Cabling Management

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13-1
Setting Connectors In Service
............................................................................................................................................ 13-2
Setting Connectors Out Of Service ................................................................................................................................... 13-3

Configuring the Cabling between 2 Connectors
Deleting the Cabling between 2 Connectors
.......................................................................................................... 13-4
................................................................................................................. 13-5
Exporting the Cabling Configuration to an XML File ............................................................................................... 13-6

14
Loopback Tests
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14-1
About Loopbacks
14-2
Introducing Loopbacks .......................................................................................................................................................... 14-2
Loopback Parameters in Display Mode
.......................................................................................................................... 14-3
Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode ......................................................................................................................... 14-5

Managing loopbacks
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-6
14-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xii
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Displaying Existing Loopbacks
......................................................................................................................................... 14-7
Creating Loopbacks ................................................................................................................................................................ 14-8

14-8
14-9
Deleting Loopbacks ................................................................................................................................................................ 14-9
15
Protection Management
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15-1
About 1626 LM Protection

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-2
15-2
Protection Principles
.............................................................................................................................................................. 15-3
15-3
Recommended Board Location
....................................................................................................................................... 15-10
The Protection Activation Process
.................................................................................................................................. 15-11
Managing Protection
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-13
15-13
Protection Displayed Information ................................................................................................................................... 15-14
Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection ...................................................................................... 15-17
Controlling Protection
16
......................................................................................................................................................... 15-18
15-18
Monitoring Procedures
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16-1
Displaying Instantaneous Measurements
....................................................................................................................... 16-2
Displaying the Abnormal Condition List ........................................................................................................................ 16-6

Displaying Event Logs
.......................................................................................................................................................... 16-7
16-7
Displaying the Channel margin
.......................................................................................................................................... 16-8
Displaying Power Level per Channel Frequency ...................................................................................................... 16-10

17
Performance Monitoring
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17-1
About Performance Management

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-3
17-3
Performance Counters
........................................................................................................................................................... 17-4
17-4
Performance Monitoring Mechanism
.............................................................................................................................. 17-7
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xiii
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Counter Thresholds ................................................................................................................................................................. 17-8

17-8
Possible Counter Threshold Values
.................................................................................................................................. 17-9
Managing Counter Threshold Tables

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-11
17-11
Displaying Counter Threshold Tables
........................................................................................................................... 17-12
Modifying Counter Threshold Tables ............................................................................................................................ 17-13

Managing Performance Monitoring
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-14
17-14
Starting Performance Monitoring (PM) ........................................................................................................................ 17-15
Resetting Counter Values
................................................................................................................................................... 17-17
17-17
Refreshing Counter Values
................................................................................................................................................ 17-18
17-18
Stopping Performance Monitoring
................................................................................................................................. 17-19
Creating a Trail Monitor (TM) ......................................................................................................................................... 17-20

Deleting a Trail Monitor (TM) ......................................................................................................................................... 17-21
Consulting Performance Data
17-22
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-22
Performance Current Data Displayed Information ................................................................................................... 17-23
Performance History Data Displayed Information
................................................................................................... 17-24
Consulting Performance Current Data
.......................................................................................................................... 17-25
Consulting Performance History Data
.......................................................................................................................... 17-26
Refreshing Current Counter Values ................................................................................................................................ 17-27

Refreshing History Counter Values
................................................................................................................................ 17-28
Managing Performance Monitoring From a Unique Entry Point

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-29
17-29
Understanding the PM Overview Window .................................................................................................................. 17-30
Managing Performance Monitoring from the PM Overview Window
18
............................................................. 17-31
System Information Collection and Exportation

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-1
18-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xiv
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Inventory Displayed Information ...................................................................................................................... 18-2

Uploading the System Remote Inventory ....................................................................................................................... 18-3
Capturing the System Components Remote Inventory Information
Exporting System Configuration to an XML File
19
.................................................................... 18-4
....................................................................................................... 18-6
Alarm Management
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-1
19-1
About Alarms
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-3
19-3
Alarm Types
.............................................................................................................................................................................. 19-4
19-4
.................................................................................................................................................... 19-5
19-5
................................................................................................................................ 19-7
Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles
....................................................................................................... 19-8
Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 19-10
19-10
Displaying ASAP Detailed Information
....................................................................................................................... 19-11
Creating an ASAP ................................................................................................................................................................. 19-12

19-12
Modifying an ASAP ............................................................................................................................................................. 19-14
19-14
Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity
.................................................................................................................... 19-16
Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities
........................................................................................................ 19-18
De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities
......................................................................................................... 19-20
Deleting ASAPs ..................................................................................................................................................................... 19-22

19-22
Managing Alarm Threshold Tables
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 19-23
19-23
Alarm Threshold Parameters
............................................................................................................................................ 19-24
19-24
Displaying Board Alarm Threshold

Creating Alarm Threshold Tables
............................................................................................................................... 19-27
................................................................................................................................... 19-28
Assigning an Alarm Threshold to a Board ................................................................................................................... 19-30

Modifying Alarm Threshold Tables
............................................................................................................................... 19-31
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xv
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deleting Alarm Threshold Tables
................................................................................................................................... 19-33
Managing Auto Discovery Alarm

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 19-34
19-34
Enabling/Disabling Auto Discovery Alarm ................................................................................................................. 19-35
20
Equipment Alarms
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-1
20-1
AUP (Auxiliary Unit Problem)
.......................................................................................................................................... 20-3
COCE (Configuration Or Customization Error)

EQPT (Equipment Malfunction)
.......................................................................................................... 20-4
....................................................................................................................................... 20-5
HT (High Temperature) ......................................................................................................................................................... 20-6

20-6
HVCSP (Heating or ventilation or Cooling System Problem)
IPD (Input Power Degraded)
IPL (Input Power Loss)
............................................................................... 20-7
.............................................................................................................................................. 20-8
......................................................................................................................................................... 20-9
20-9
20-10
LA (LA Alarm) ............................................................................................................................................................... 20-10
OCCO (Optical Connector Cover Open)
..................................................................................................................... 20-11
OPD (Output Power Degraded) ....................................................................................................................................... 20-12

OPL (Output Power Loss)
................................................................................................................................................. 20-13
PD (Performance Degraded) ............................................................................................................................................. 20-14

PP (Power Problem) ............................................................................................................................................................. 20-15
20-15
RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing)
.................................................................................................................................. 20-16
RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem)
................................................................................................................................... 20-17
RUTM (Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch)

RUU (Replaceable Unit Unknown)
................................................................................................................ 20-18
............................................................................................................................... 20-19
SCP (Serial Communication Problem)
......................................................................................................................... 20-20
20-21
TD (Transmitter Degraded) ............................................................................................................................................... 20-21
TF (Transmitter Failure) ..................................................................................................................................................... 20-22
20-22
TOOR (Temperature Out Of Range)
............................................................................................................................. 20-23
UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present)

UDCL (User Data Channel Loss)
..................................................................................................................... 20-24
................................................................................................................................... 20-25
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xvi
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VM (Version Mismatch) ..................................................................................................................................................... 20-26

20-26
WD (Wavelength Deviation)
21
............................................................................................................................................ 20-27
Transmission Alarms
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 21-1
21-1
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)
........................................................................................................................................... 21-2
CSF (Communication Subsystem Failure)

LBER (Low Bit Error Rate)
LOF (Loss Of Frame)
.................................................................................................................... 21-3
................................................................................................................................................ 21-4
21-4
............................................................................................................................................................ 21-5
21-5
LOMF (Loss Of Multi-Frame)
........................................................................................................................................... 21-6
LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section) ................................................................................................................................. 21-7

LOS (Loss Of Signal)
............................................................................................................................................................ 21-8
21-8
LOSC (Loss Of Supervisory Channel) ............................................................................................................................ 21-9

LOSCF (Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame) ......................................................................................................... 21-10
LOW (Loss Of Wavelength)
............................................................................................................................................. 21-11
LTCER (Low Threshold Corrected Error) ................................................................................................................... 21-12

otnTIM (Optical Transport etwork Trace Identifier Mismatch)
SSF (Server Signal Failure)
....................................................................... 21-13
.............................................................................................................................................. 21-14
SSF- i (Server Signal Failure - ingress)
........................................................................................................................ 21-16
SSF- e (Server Signal Failure - egress) ......................................................................................................................... 21-17

TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm) ................................................................................................................................... 21-18
TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)
UAT (UnAvailable Time)
UE (Uncorrected Error)
.................................................................................................................................... 21-19
................................................................................................................................................... 21-20
21-20
...................................................................................................................................................... 21-21
21-21
URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)

22
................................................................................................................... 21-22
Processing Alarms
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 22-1
22-1
DB (Database Corrupted)
..................................................................................................................................................... 22-2
22-2
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xvii
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xviii
List of tables
3-1
Transmission Specific Graphical Conventions
3-2
Views Menu
3-3
Configuration Menu
...............................................................................................................................................
3-21
3-4
Configuration Menu
...............................................................................................................................................
3-23
3-5
Supervision Menu
...................................................................................................................................................
3-23
3-6
Download Menu
...................................................................................................................................................... 3-24
3-7
Equipment Menu
..................................................................................................................................................... 3-24
3-8
Board menu
3-9
Alarm Severity Levels ........................................................................................................................................... 3-26
3-10
Management Status Indicators
3-11
Search Criteria Parameters
4-1
Access State Icon Status
6-1
1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters
6-2
............................................................................................
3-16
.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-20
............................................................................................................................................................... 3-24
...........................................................................................................................
3-29
..................................................................................................................................
3-33
.........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
4-7
6-4
TP Server etwork Address Parameters ........................................................................................................ 6-6
6-3
...............................................................................................................................
6-7
6-4
IP Routing Parameters
.............................................................................................................................................
6-9
6-5
LAPD Parameters
9-1
Transponder Models and Features
....................................................................................................................
9-13
9-2
Concentrator Models and Features
...................................................................................................................
9-16
9-3
Mux/Demux Models and Features .................................................................................................................... 9-17
9-4
OMDX Specificities ............................................................................................................................................... 9-17
9-5
TRBD4xxx Maximum Acceptable Input Power .......................................................................................... 9-22
...................................................................................................................................................
6-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xix
List of tables
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-6
TRBD4312 Maximum Acceptable Input Power .......................................................................................... 9-22
9-7
TRBD1x9z Maximum Acceptable Input Power
..........................................................................................
9-22
9-8
TRBD1xyz Maximum Acceptable Input Power
..........................................................................................
9-23
9-9
TRBC4xxx Maximum Acceptable Input Power
..........................................................................................
9-26
9-10
CMDX Band Parameter Table ............................................................................................................................ 9-54
9-11
Contradirectionality Parameters table
.............................................................................................................
9-54
9-12
TRBx Transmission Parameters Table
............................................................................................................
9-55
9-13
LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table ............................................................................................................... 9-57
9-14
ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Parameter Table
9-15
ETHC Configuration Mode Parameters Table
9-16
2*GE_FC Signal Type Transportation Parameters Table
9-17
TDMX 1180 Port Profile Parameters Table
9-18
WMA 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table
..............................................................................................
9-59
9-19
WMA 3x74 Provisioning Parameters Table
..............................................................................................
9-60
9-20
OSCU Channel Supervision Synchronization Parameter Table
9-21
TRBx/ALCT Laser Output Power Configuration Parameter Table ...................................................... 9-62
9-22
WMA 1100 Laser Output Power Configuration Parameters Table ................................................... 9-63
9-23
WMA 3174 Laser Power Configuration Parameters Table .................................................................. 9-63
9-24
TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table .......................................................................................................................... 9-64
9-25
APT Modes Table
...................................................................................................................................................
9-65
9-26
VOA Modes Table
..................................................................................................................................................
9-66
9-27
APT/VOA Parameters Table
9-28
APSD Parameters Table ........................................................................................................................................ 9-68
9-29
TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table
9-30
WMA 3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters Table
9-31
Firmware Activation Displayed Information .............................................................................................. 9-107
9-32
Laser Control Parameters Table
9-33
External Input Point Parameters Table .......................................................................................................... 9-115
9-34
External Output Point Parameters
..........................................................................
9-58
.............................................................................................
9-58
.........................................................................
9-59
..................................................................................................
9-59
............................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................
..........................................................................
......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................
9-62
9-67
9-70
9-71
9-109
9-115
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xx
List of tables
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-1
R-OADM and TR-OADM Main Characteristics
........................................................................................
10-3
10-2
R-OADM and TR-OADM Significant Boards
............................................................................................
10-5
11-1
TP (Termination Points) ........................................................................................................................................ 11-5
11-2
RS-TTI/J0 Parameters
11-3
TTI Parameters
12-1
Cross Connection Parameters
14-1
14-2
Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode
15-1
Protection Parameters
16-1
Channel Margin States
..........................................................................................................................................
16-8
17-1
...........................................................................................................................................
17-4
17-2
15 minutes Counter Thresholds
17-3
24 hours Counter Thresholds
17-4
...........................................................................................................................................
11-8
...................................................................................................................................................... 11-11
.............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
........................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
12-4
14-4
14-5
15-14
.........................................................................................................................
17-9
...........................................................................................................................
17-10
Current Data Parameters
....................................................................................................................................
17-23
17-5
History Data Parameters
....................................................................................................................................
17-24
18-1
Remote Inventory Displayed Information
19-1
Alarm Severity Levels ........................................................................................................................................... 19-5
19-2
System ASAP
19-3
BMDX Alarm Thresholds
.................................................................................................................................
19-24
19-4
CMDX Alarm Thresholds
.................................................................................................................................
19-24
19-5
OMDX Alarm Thresholds
.................................................................................................................................
19-24
19-6
LOFA Alarm Thresholds
....................................................................................................................................
19-25
19-7
WMA 3174 Alarm Thresholds
......................................................................................................................
19-25
19-8
WMA 1100 Alarm Thresholds
......................................................................................................................
19-25
19-9
TDMX Alarm Thresholds .................................................................................................................................. 19-25
.....................................................................................................
18-2
........................................................................................................................................................... 19-8
19-10 TRBD and TRBC Alarm Threshold
..............................................................................................................
19-26
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xxi
List of figures
2-1
1626 LM Management Context
........................................................................................................................... 2-2
3-1
Example of an Equipment View Window
3-2
Example of a Subrack View Window
3-3
Example of an ESCT Board View
3-4
Example of a 2*GBE_FC Board View
3-5
Example of a TRBD Board View ...................................................................................................................... 3-10
3-6
Example of an ETHC Board View With SFP/XFP Modules
3-7
Example of an OMDX Board View
3-8
Example of a Transmission View Window .................................................................................................... 3-15
3-9
Example of an Equipment Overview Window
............................................................................................. 3-18
3-10
Alarm Severity Indicators / o Raised Alarms
............................................................................................ 3-26
3-11
Alarm Severity Indicators / Raised Alarms
3-12
Operation Domain Alarm Indicators ................................................................................................................ 3-28
9-1
ETHC Basic Concept
9-2
Example of ETHC-TRBD1191 connection
9-3
Illustration of an ETHC in Concentration Mode ............................................................................................ 9-8
9-4
Illustration of an ETHC in Add & Drop Mode
9-5
TRBD1191 Basic Concept ................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9-6
4 LOFA11xx Repeater Configuration .............................................................................................................. 9-38
11-1
OGPI Ports and Associated Boards
11-2
OTS Ports and Associated Boards ..................................................................................................................... 11-4
14-1
Loopback and Continue User/Client Side ...................................................................................................... 14-2
........................................................................................................ 3-3
................................................................................................................ 3-5
....................................................................................................................... 3-7
.............................................................................................................. 3-8
.................................................................. 3-11
................................................................................................................. 3-13
................................................................................................... 3-26
............................................................................................................................................... 9-5
9-5
..................................................................................................... 9-6
............................................................................................... 9-8
.................................................................................................................. 11-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xxiii
List of figures
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-2
Loopback and Continue Line Side .................................................................................................................... 14-3
14-3
Loopback and Cut Line Side ............................................................................................................................... 14-3
15-1
OSC P Principles ................................................................................................................................................... 15-3
15-2
OS CP Activation
15-3
Example of OMSP Implementation
15-4
OMSP Switching cases
17-1
CA/PM-AS Raise and Clear Logic ................................................................................................................... 17-8
19-1
Alarm Severity Indicators / o Raised Alarms
19-2
Alarm Severity Indicators / Raised Alarms
19-3
Operation Domain Alarm Indicators ................................................................................................................ 19-7
.................................................................................................................................................. 15-4
................................................................................................................. 15-6
......................................................................................................................................... 15-7
............................................................................................ 19-5
................................................................................................... 19-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xxiv
About this document

About this document
Purpose
This document:
describes all the required information to enable the 1626 LM operator to manage the
day-to-day operations.
reflects the contents of the 1626 LM online help.
This document specifically describes:
the operation general context,
the operation and maintenance GUI (Graphical User Interface),
the operation parameters to be managed,
the operation procedures to be performed,
the equipment alarms and related corrective actions,
the transmission alarms and related corrective actions.
Intended audience
This document is designed for 1626 LM operators who need to be assisted in

understanding or performing the 1626 LM management tasks.
Supported systems
This document covers the features of 1626 LM Release 5.0B.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xxv
About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How to use this document
The User Provisioning Guide is divided into the following topics as described in the table
of contents:
Discovering Alcatel Lucent 1626 LM
Contains a general description of the product

features and refers to all covered topics.
Before You Start with 1626 LM Management
Describes the required hardware and

installation tasks to perform before to start the
1626 LM management.
Introduces and describes the main features of

the operation and maintenance user interface.
1626 LM Management Startup
Describes the operation starting procedures.
Describes software packages management

procedures.
Describes parameters and procedures to set up

all the required addresses and network
identifiers.
Describes MIB backup and restore

management procedures.
Rack and Subrack Management
Describes the procedures to declare and

undeclare racks and subracks.
Describes required parameters and procedures

to declare and configure 1626 LM boards and
transceiver modules.
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration

Management
Describes configuration parameters and

procedures to set Tunable and/or
Reconfigurable OADM configuration.
Describes entities involved in transmission

management and specific transmission
parameters.
Describes:
the boards involved in cross connections

and the main cross connection principles,
the cross connection parameters and

procedures.
Describes connector and cabling declaration

and activation procedures.
Loopback Tests
Explains the loopback principle and describes

the loopback parameters and procedures.
Explains the protection principles and

describes protection parameters and
procedures.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xxvi
About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Describes the monitoring procedures to

display instantaneous measurements, abnormal
condition list and event logs.
Describes:
System Information Collection and

Exportation
Alarm Management
the performance counters and performance

monitoring mechanisms,
the performance threshold management,
the performance monitoring procedures.
Describes:
the procedures to display and to load

system inventory and firmware
how to export system configuration

information to an xml file.
Explains:
the various alarm indicators and severity

levels,
the alarm severity profiles management

principles.
Describes alarm threshold table parameters

and operation procedures.
Equipment Alarms
Describes equipment alarms and related

corrective actions.
Transmission Alarms
Describes transmission alarms and related

corrective actions.
Processing Alarms
Describes the alarm raised when data are

corrupted and the required actions to perform
for clearing this alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xxvii
About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related documentation
Alcatel-Lucent also provides the following documents to help you plan, install, and
operate your 1626 LM equipment and associated operating tools:
DOCUMENT TYPE
1626LM R5.0B Performance Design
Specification
PART NUMBER
8DG 170740039 DSZZA
1626LM R5.0B SPLM User Provisioning

Guide
3AL 75164 BAAA
1626LM R5.0B Product Information and

Planning Guide
3AL 75164 EAAA
1626LM R5.0B Maintenance and

Trouble-Clearing Guide
3AL 75164 FAAA
1626LM R5.0B Safety Guide
3AL 75164 HAAA
1626LM R5.0B System Turn-Up Guide
3AL 75164 GAAA
1626LM R5.0B Installation Handbook
3AL 75164 KAAA
1626LM R5.0B O DP Installation Guide
3AL 75164 LAAA
1626LM R5.0B O DP Engineering and

Planning Tool User Guide
3AL 75164 JAAA
1626LM R5.0B O DP User Guide CDROM
3AL 75184 AAAA
1626LM R5.0B Customer Doc CD
3AL 75165 AAAA
Related training
Alcatel-Lucent University provides courses to train telecommunication technicians in

installation, operations, and maintenance personnel. Contact Alcatel-Lucent at
1-888-582-3688 to enroll in training classes.
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local customer support team. Reach them via the web
at http://alcatel-lucent.com/support or through the telephone number listed under the
Technical Assistance Center menu at https://support.lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do
(https://support.lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do) .
How to order
To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, use the following website: https://support.lucent.com

(http://support.alcatel-lucent.com)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xxviii
About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Quality policy
We ensure that everything we do must be focused on becoming the trusted partner of our
customers by:
Delivering high quality, secure and reliable products, services, software and solutions
the first time, every time, and on time - as promised.
Continuously making improvements and looking for innovative ways to anticipate

and fully meet the highest expectations of our customers.
Counting on all employees to be personally accountable for putting the customer first
and honoring the commitments we make.
This policy will be regularly reviewed, updated as necessary, applied and communicated
to all employees and persons working for or on behalf of Alcatel-Lucent, and made
available to interested parties and the public.
Safety messages
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.
How to comment
You can send your feedback to your local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center at
https://support.lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do (https://support.lucent.com/portal/
olcsHome.do) . Your feedback will be forwarded to the appropriate documentation team
for evaluation and action, as appropriate. Be sure to cite the relevant information such as
product name, document title, document ID, release, issue number, date, page number,
etc. in your feedback.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
xxix
1 iscovering Alcatel-Lucent
D
1626 LM
Overview
Purpose
This chapter gives a brief description of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM features and lists the
operation domain you can access to manage your configuration.
Contents
1-2
Introducing Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM
1-2
1-3
Introducing Alcatel-Lucent LM Management
1-3
1-4
Online Help Scope
1-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
1-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM (Light Manager) is a third-generation DWDM platform that
addresses long-haul to ultra long-haul terrestrial applications. The 1626 LM supports the
best of terrestrial technologies to provide the following unmatched performance at the
lower cost:
a capacity of up to 96 channels at 10 and 40 Gbps in the extended C-band,
spanning distances up to 4,500 km without electrical regeneration.
The 1626 LM can be used to upgrade existing links, resulting in cost-efficiency and better
performance for legacy platforms, and it can be used for new DWDM deployments,
providing the most competitive technology on the market. The system helps service
providers move traffic efficiently and reliably throughout the network, minimizing their
total cost of ownership
See Also
Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Management (p. 1-3)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
1-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The 1626 LM is managed through a friendly and intuitive Graphical User Interface.
Any operational support is provided by an online help facility which covers the following
chapters:
Chapter 2, Before You Start With 1626 LM Management
Chapter 3, Operation Graphical User Interface
Chapter 4, 1626 LM Management Start Up
Chapter 5, Software Download Management
Chapter 6, Communication Configuration
Chapter 7, Database Backup and Restore
Chapter 8, Racks and Subracks Management
Chapter 9, Board and SFP/XFP Module Management
Chapter 10, R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management
Chapter 11, Transmission Management
Chapter 12, Cross Connection Management
Chapter 13, Connector and Cabling Management
Chapter 14, Loopback Tests
Chapter 15, Protection Management
Chapter 16, Monitoring Procedures
Chapter 17, Performance Monitoring
Chapter 18, System Information Collection and Exportation
Chapter 19, Alarm Management
Chapter 20, Equipment Alarms
Chapter 21, Transmission Alarms
Chapter 22, Processing Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
1-3

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Online Help Scope
Supported systems
This Online Help covers the features of 1626 LM Release 5.0B.

Online Help release
The release of this current Online Help is: V5.0B-4.

To access the Online Help contents
To access the Online Help contents, click on the following link:

Chapter 1, Discovering Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
1-4
2 efore You Start With

B
1626 LM Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains how to perform the required actions to put in place the 1626 LM
management means.
Contents
2-2
2-2
Craft Terminal Hardware Requirements
2-3
Software Requirements
2-3
2-4
Installing the Craft Terminal Application
2-5
Uninstalling the Craft Terminal Application
2-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
2-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The 1626 LM is managed through a Graphical User Interface which is hosted either
remotely by a 1353 M platform or locally by a PC equipped with a 1320 CT (Craft
Terminal) application. The management protocol is Q3 and the default network is OSI.
When the 1626 LM is managed from a Craft terminal application, the communication
interface is an RS232 serial line.
Figure 2-1, 1626 LM Management Context (p. 2-2) illustrates the 1626 LM
management context.
Figure 2-1 1626 LM Management Context
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
2-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ote: Because the Craft Terminal application runs exclusively on the hosting PC, the
two concepts are often merged and Craft Terminal usually means both the application
and the PC.
The following topics give useful information about:
Craft Terminal Hardware Requirements (p. 2-3)

Software Requirements (p. 2-3)
Craft Terminal Hardware Requirements

The Craft Terminal hardware consists in a PC which complies with the following
minimum requirements:
CPU: Pentium II or higher,
RAM: 256 Mbytes,
Display: 15,4", 65536 colors, 1024x768,
1 CDROM drive,
3 buttons mouse or trackball,
Serial cable.
Software Requirements
The Craft Terminal PC must run on Windows T, 2000 or XP version and be installed
with the software delivered on the Master setup CDROM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
2-3

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the operation procedures to be performed to install and uninstall the
Craft Terminal applications.
Contents
2-5
2-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
2-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to install the Craft Terminal application in the following
circumstances:
Craft Terminal application first installation,
Craft Terminal application release change.
Before you begin
You must have the Master setup CDROM.

How to install the Craft Terminal application
To install the Craft Terminal application, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the Master setup CDROM into the CDROM drive.

Result: The installation wizard starts
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If first installation, perform the following:

1. Click Next until the language selection window is displayed.
2. Select the language and click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Next until the WDM Master setup - IntallShield Wizard window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tick the software components to install and click Next.

For first installation: Tick all the software components.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each software component installation:

1. Click Next.
2. Wait for the end of installation and click Finish.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the Master setup CDROM from the CDROM drive.

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
2-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
This procedure describes the step by step actions to perform when you want to uninstall
the Craft terminal application.
How to uninstall the Craft Terminal application
To uninstall the Craft Terminal application, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Windows task bar, click Start>Settings>Control Panel>Add/Remove

Programs.
Result: The Add/Remove Programs windows opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the program to remove and click Change/Remove.

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
2-6
3 peration Graphical User

O
Interface
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the main windows of the 1626 LM GUI ( Graphical User
Interface). From these main screens, you can perform all the operation tasks to manage
the 1626 LM configuration.
Contents
3-2
3-3
3-5
The Board View Window
3-7
The Transmission View Window
3-15
3-18
3-20
The Title Bar
3-20
The Menu Bar
3-20
3-26
3-28
3-29
Describing and Using the Search for Termination Point Input Windows
3-31
Search for Termination Point Input Window
3-32
3-32
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-1

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
You manage the 1626 LM via a GUI (Graphical User Interface). Once you have
performed the complete startup procedure, the GUI displays the management entry
window of the 1626 LM you are connected to.
Contents
3-3
3-5
3-7
3-15
3-18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-1 Example of an Equipment View Window
This is the entry window which gives access to the first level of the hardware structure:
the rack level.
Depending on your configuration, you may have a single rack configuration or a multi
rack configuration.
The empty spaces show the possible secondary racks to be provisioned.
The left rack is called the master rack. It contains at least one subrack.
To access to the subrack view, double click on its graphical representation.
You then access to the boards and empty slots graphical representations.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The displayed icons have the following meaning:

Icon
Meaning
The component has raised at least one alarm.
The color is dependant on the higher alarm severity.
The component has no raised alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-2, Example of a Subrack View Window (p. 3-5) gives an example of a subrack
view window of the 1626 LM.
Figure 3-2 Example of a Subrack View Window
This window displays the representation of the boards in the subrack.

The empty spaces show empty slots that you can select to declare a new board.
When you select a card, the border of its graphical representation is highligthed as shown
in Figure 3-2, Example of a Subrack View Window (p. 3-5).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Icon
Meaning
The component is inserted but not declared.
The component is in service.
To access to the board view window, double-click on the graphical representation of a

board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The board view window may have several aspects depending on the type of selected
boards. The following illustrations give some examples of what you can see when
displaying boards.
Figure 3-3 Example of an ESCT Board View
This window is quite empty because an ESCT board cannot have any SFP/XFP modules,
and is not involved in the transmission process.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-7

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can however see:
the Administrative state of the board. Its color depends on its current status which can
be In Service or Out of Service.
the alarms that the board can raise.

Green color indicates that there is not any alarms. In case of raised alarms the related
alarm graphical representation will have the color corresponding to the configured
severity level.
Figure 3-4 Example of a 2*GBE_FC Board View
This window shows the example of a 2*GE_FC board which has one declared SFP
module.
The empty spaces show empty SFP slots that you can select to declare new SFP modules.
When you select an SFP module, the border of its graphical representation is highligthed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Icon
Meaning
You can see:
the alarms that the board can raise. Green color indicates that there is not any alarms.
In case of raised alarms the related alarm graphical representation will have the color
corresponding to the configured severity level.
To access to the transmission view window, double-click on the graphical representation

of a SFP module. The transmission view is then built from the selected SFP module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-5 Example of a TRBD Board View
This window shows an example of a TRBD board which has one port in service.
When you select an SFP module, the border of its graphical representation is highligthed.
You can see:

severity level.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-10

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To access to the transmission view window, you double-click on the graphical

representation of the port. The transmission view is then built from the selected port.
Figure 3-6 Example of an ETHC Board View With SFP/XFP Modules
This window shows an example of an ETHC board which has:
one port in service on the mother board.

This port supports the concentration of the Ethernet flow streaming via the XFP
module.
two SFP modules (over 9 possible) to interconnect with the client network.
The empty spaces show empty SFP slots that you can select to declare a new SFP or
XFP module.
When you select an SFP module, the border of its graphical representation is highligthed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-11

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Icon
Meaning
You can see:

severity level.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-12

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-7 Example of an OMDX Board View
This window shows an example of 4 ports in service of an OMDX board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-13

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can see:

severity level.
The presence of several graphical representations with the same alarm acronym
means that the alarm can be raised from several points of the board. Mouse focus on
an alarm graphic representation gives information on each point.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-14

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-8 Example of a Transmission View Window
This window shows an example of a transmission view window built from the selected
port.
It is composed of blocks which represent the TP (Termination Points) involved in the
transmission process.
You can read the transmission view according two perspectives as explained in the
following:
If you consider...
Then...
the left block as the

reference block
the sink signal flows from left to right until the Optical
Regeneration Point.
The icons mentioned at the top of the block refer to the sink
alarms that the block can raise.
The source signal flows from the Optical Regeneration Point to

the left.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-15

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you consider...
Then...
the right block as the

reference block
The sink signal flows from right to left until the Optical
Regeneration Point.
The icons mentioned at the bottom of the block refer to the sink
alarms that the block can raise.
The source signal flows from the Optical Regeneration to the

right.
In case of multiplexing blocks (OMS, ODU2 or RSTTP), you can double click to expand
the representation. In this context, the next TP appear. You then see the complete
transmission view beginning from the initial selected block.
The following table describes the transmission specific graphical conventions.
Table 3-1
Transmission Graphical
Representations
Description
TTP (Trail Termination Point)
CTP (Connection Termination Point)
TTP and CTP
TTP and CTP with:
FEC enabled,
Cross Connection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-16

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-1
Transmission Graphical
Representations
(continued)
Description
TTP with Performance Monitoring enabled.
TTP with a loopback.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-17

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-9, Example of an Equipment Overview Window (p. 3-18) gives an example of
an equipment overview window.
Figure 3-9 Example of an Equipment Overview Window
This window displays a tree diagram representation of your configuration.

Each box represents a specific component that you can expand or reduce by a double
click or a right click.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-18

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right clicking a component box gives access to a contextual menu list that notably
enables to:
expand or hide the tree representation,
navigate to other views,
access to the transmission view from a port level.

Icon
Meaning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-19

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the areas which are always displayed and accessible from the 1626
LM GUI.
Contents
The Title Bar
3-20
The Menu Bar
3-20
3-26
3-28
3-29
The Title Bar

The title bar displays the name and the release number of the selected 1626 LM.
The Menu Bar

The menu bar is always displayed. From each of the menu items you can perform
management tasks described in the next tables:
View menu
Configuration menu
Diagnosis menu
Supervision menu
Download menu
Equipment menu
Board Menu
Table 3-2
Views Menu
First Menu Item
Submenu
Description
Backward
one.
Enables to return to the previous visited window.
Forward
one.
Enables to re-access the next window from a visited

window.
Equipment
one.
Displays the 1626 LM Equipment view.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-20

The Menu Bar
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-2
Views Menu
First Menu Item
(continued)
Submenu
Description
Equipment
Overview
one.
Display a graphical representation of the

configuration hierarchy.
External Points
one.
Lists the external devices connected to the 1626

LM.
Transmission
one.
Opens the TP Search window.

Enables to select TP according to search criteria.
Open Object
one.
Displays the view of a selected managed entity.
Open in window
one.
Displays the view of a selected managed entity in a

new window.
Close
one.
Closes the Graphical User Interface.
Table 3-3
Configuration Menu
First Menu Item

Alarm Severity...
Submenu
one.
Description
Opens the ASAP Management
window.
Lists the existing ASAP and enables
ASAP management.
Set Alarm Severities...
one.
Opens the Set ASAP window.

Enables to assign ASAP to managed
entities.
NE Time...
one.
Opens the NE Time window.

Enables to set the E time with the
1353 M time.
Performance
Threshold
Tables...
Opens PM Threshold Table Select

window.
Enables to manage Performance
Monitoring Threshold tables.
Cross Connection Management...
one.
Opens the Cross Connection

Management window.
Enables to list existing cross
connections and to perform cross
connection management commands.
Loopback Management...
one.
Opens Signal Loopback

Management window.
Enables to list existing loopbacks
and to perform loopback
management commands.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-21

The Menu Bar
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-3
Configuration Menu
(continued)
First Menu Item
Submenu
Description
Comm/Routing
Local
Configuration
Opens the Local Configuration

window.
Enables to manage the 1626 LM
network addresses.
OS
Configuration
Opens the OS Configuration

window.
Enables to manage the 1353 M
network addresses.
NTP Server
Configuration
Opens the NTP Server

Configuration window.
Enables to manage the TP server
network addresses.
Connectors/Cabling...
Interface
Configuration >
LAPD
Configuration
Opens LAPD Configuration window.
Interface
Configuration >
Ethernet
Configuration
Opens Ethernet Configuration

window.
IP Configuration
> IP Static
Routing
Configuration
Opens IP Static Routing

Configuration window.
one.
Enables to set LAPD.
Enables to set Ethernet addresses.
Enables to set specific route to reach

specific IP node.
Opens Connectors Configuration
window.
Enables to activate the connectors
and to declare the cabling between
the different boards.
Transmission Update
one.
Starts the update of the

Transmission model.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-22

The Menu Bar
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-4
Configuration Menu
First Menu Item
Submenu
Description
Alarms
NE Alarms...
Object Alarms...
Launch the ALMAP (AS) Alarm Surveillance

window.
Subtree
Alarms...
Display the details of the raised alarms for each of

the selected managed entities.
Equipment
Alarms...
Transmission
Alarms...
External Points
Alarms...
Log Browsing
Command Log
Alarm Log
Event log
View
Remote
Inventory...
Open the Event Log browsing application which

enables to retrieve commands, alarms and event
according to search criteria.
Lists respectively the inventory or the firmware
version of a selected hardware component.
Firmware
version...
Abnormal Condition
List
Table 3-5
one.
Lists the boards which are not working properly.

From a selected item of the list, you can display a
view which focus on the malfunction.
Supervision Menu
First Menu Item
Submenu
Description
Access State
OS
Requested
Enables to grant the access rights to the Craft

Terminal application (Requested) or to the 1353 M
(OS).
Resynchronize
Enables to:
Allow Notifs
resynchronize the alarm with the Craft Terminal

application,
activate the alarm notification,
inhibit the alarm notification.
Alarms
Inhibit Notifs
Upload Remote
Inventory
one.
Starts the remote inventory upload.
Restart NE...
one.
Reboots the 1626 LM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-23

The Menu Bar
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-6
Download Menu
First Menu Item
Submenu
Description
Init Download...
one.
Opens a window which enables to select the

required software package to download on the 1626
LM.
Units Info...
one.
Opens a window which enables to display the status

of a selected software package.
MIB Management...
one.
Opens a window which enables to save and to

restore MIB.
MIB Configuration
Mode...
Table 3-7
Online
Sets the online MIB configuration.
Equipment Menu
First Menu Item
Submenu
Description
Set...
one.
Enables to declare the selected hardware

component.
Modify...
one.
Enables to modify the declaration of a selected

hardware component.
Remove
one.
Enables to undeclare a selected hardware

component.
Set in Service
one.
Activates a selected hardware component for

operation.
Set out of Service
one.
Deactivates a selected hardware component and

prevents most of operation tasks.
Remote Inventory
Rack Level
Subrack Level
Starts the remote inventory upload for the selected

hardware component.
Board Level
Show Supporting
Equipment
Instantaneous
measurement on
Table 3-8
one.
Selected object
Highlights the unit which hosts the selected or

displayed hardware component.
Starts the instantaneous measurement on a selected
hardware component.
Board menu
First Menu Item
Submenu
Description
Show Supporting
Equipment
one.
Highlights the unit which hosts the selected or

displayed board.
Optical Power level

Configuration
one.
Opens the laser output power configuration window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-24

The Menu Bar
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-8
Board menu
First Menu Item
(continued)
Submenu
Description
Modify Equipment
Configuration
one.
Opens board parameter configuration window.
Modify Specific
Equipment
Configuration
one.
Manage ETHC
Connections
one.
Opens the matrix window displaying the cross

connections between the Client/User line and the
WDM lines.
Alarm Threshold
Configuration
one.
Opens the alarm threshold configuration window.
APT/MSV
one.
Opens the amplifier laser output power

configuration window.
APSD Configuration
one.
Opens the Automatic Power ShutDown

configuration window for amplifier boards.
ote: Board menu appears only when a board is selected.

The described menu items are contextual to the type of the selected board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-25

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The 1626 LM tracks and reports faults. If a fault occurs, an alarm is generated.
You can identify very quickly if alarms have been reported with the alarm severity
indicators located at the top left of the GUI.
According to the severity level, Alarm indicators display different shapes and colors:
When there are no raised alarms, indicators are just rectangles, without any numbers as
illustrated the following figure.
Figure 3-10 Alarm Severity Indicators / No Raised Alarms
When there are raised alarms, indicators display a circle with a figure for the number of
alarms corresponding to the severity level. The following figure gives an example of
alarm indicators displaying raised alarms.
Figure 3-11 Alarm Severity Indicators / Raised Alarms
Alarm severity levels are defined as mentioned in the following table.

Table 3-9
Alarm Severity Levels
Severity
Levels
Colors
Description
CRITICAL (CRI)
Red
A service-affecting condition has occurred and immediate

corrective action is required.
MAJOR (MAJ)
Orange
A service-affecting condition has developed and urgent corrective

action is required.
MINOR (MIN)
Yellow
A non-service-affecting fault condition has occurred, and you need

to take corrective action to prevent a more serious fault (for
example, one affecting the service).
WARNING (WNG)
Cyan
Detection of a potential or impending service-affecting fault,

before any significant effects have been felt.
INDETERMINATE
(IND)
White
The severity level cannot be determined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-26

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ote: The five alarm severity indicators are greyed-out when the alarm notification
has been inhibited. The indicators keep the information they had just before the inhibit
action.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-27

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

To spot very quickly the operation domains which are impacted by alarms, you can use
the operation domain alarm indicators located at the top right of the GUI. With these
indicators, you know if alarms are related to:
External Points
Equipments
Transmissions
According to the severity level, alarms domain indicators display different shapes and
colors:
When there are no raised alarms, indicators are just rectangles, without any numbers.
When there are raised alarms, indicators display a circle with a figure for the number
of alarms corresponding to the operation domain. The following figure gives an
example of operation domain alarm indicators displaying raised and no raised alarms.
Figure 3-12 Operation Domain Alarm Indicators
The severity level conventions are the same as for alarm severity indicators.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-28

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

To have a global view of the 1626 LM operational state, you can watch the management
status indicators located vertically on the right side of the GUI.
Management status indicators are defined as mentioned in Table 3-10, Management
Status Indicators (p. 3-29)
Table 3-10
Indicator Icon
Indicator
Name
Color
Description
Supervision
Green
Supervised
Blue
Local Access
OS
Communication
Default
Configuration
Green
Granted
Blue
Denied
Green
Link Up
Red
Link Down
Green
Blue
OS Connection
State
Manager Level
Green
Abnormal
Conditions
Database
ot Active
Active
ot Connected
Blue
Connected
Green
EML (Element Management Level)
Blue
etwork Time
Protocol
ot supervised
ML ( etwork Management Level)
Brown
Disabled
Green
Enabled. o TP servers reachable.
Blue
Enabled. Only one TP server is

reachable.
Green
one
Blue
Yes
Green
Database is consistent
Blue
Database is corrupted. Database

restoration is required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-29

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-10
Indicator Icon
(continued)
Indicator
Name
Color
Description
Line
Optimization
White
o line optimization process is

running.
Red
APE (Automatic Power

Equalization) is running.
Green
Transmission aligned
Blue
Transmission misaligned.
Transmission
Misalignment
Transmission update required.
The Message Bar
The message bar is located at the bottom center of the GUI. It displays information
related to the managed entity pointed by the mouse. For example, you can see the
complete set of information related to a board location: r01sr01/board#01 (Rack#1,
Subrack#1, board in slot 1).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-30
Describing and Using the Search for Termination Point

Input Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Describing and Using the Search for Termination

Point Input Windows
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes:
the Search for Termination Point Input window that you will have the opportunity
to use in different contexts.
the procedures to perform when using this window.
Contents
3-32
3-32
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-31

Input Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

With this window, you can search for TP (Termination Points) which characteristics
match with search criteria. These search criteria are grouped within the TP Search
Criteria area.
Selection and display areas are named:
Equipment (top left side),
Termination Points (top right side).

Purpose
Use this procedure to learn how to use the Search to Termination Point Input window
How to use the Search for Termination Point input window
From the Equipment area:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand or collapse the tree structure of your configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select a displayed entity.

Attention: Board History list box is inhibited.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
From the TP Search Criteria area:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one or several search criteria.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Search.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
From the Termination Point area:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the displayed TP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, select relevant TP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-32

Input Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, use the following buttons to display specific information:
Show Mon: to show monitored TP.
Show PM: to show TP with started performance monitoring.
Attention: Show CC State is not applicable.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Search Criteria
The following table describes the search criteria you can use to search for TP.
Attention: search criteria availability are dependant on the context of use.
Table 3-11
Search Criteria Parameters
Search
Criteria
Description
Possible Values
Class
Lists all the TP types that you can select.
List of TP types
Connection
State
This search criteria is not applicable.
Alarm State
Lists all the alarm severity levels that you can use:
Non Alarmed
to select corresponding TP
Indeterminate
to search non alarmed TP.
Warning
Minor
Major
Critical
Assign State
Perf Monitoring
Enables to select:
Monitoring
Objects
Ignore
all TP whatever the performance monitoring is.
Any
TP with Performance Monitoring
None
TP without Performance monitoring
Ignore
Any
None
Enables to select all TP whether monitorable or not
Location
Name
ASAP value
Enables to search TP having alarm severity profiles

assigned.
List of alarm severity

profiles
If used this search criteria inhibits all the other

profiles except Class.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
3-33
4626 LM Management
1
Start Up
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedures to perform when you want to start up with 1626
LM management.
Starting up with 1626 LM management requires:
1. To start the Craft Terminal application,
2. To start the 1626 LM supervision,
3. To start the 1626 LM GUI (Graphical User Interface),
4. To manage the access state.
Contents
4-2
Starting the Craft Terminal Application
4-3
Starting the 1626 LM Supervision
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
Setting the Access State to the Craft Terminal Application
4-8
4-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
4-1

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic covers the following subjects:
How to start the Craft terminal application,
How to start the 1626 LM supervision,
How to start the operation and maintenance GUI (Graphical User Interface).
Contents
4-3
4-4
4-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
4-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to start the Craft Terminal application.

Before you begin
All the required software environment must be installed,
The serial cable must be connected between the Craft Terminal PC and the 1626 LM.
How to start the Craft Terminal application
To start the Craft Terminal application, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Windows task bar, select Start>Alcatel>CTK vx.x.x>Alcatel 1320CT.

Result: The Alcatel Lower Layers Manager window is displayed.
A red triangle rotates indicating the initialization is on going.

If the red triangle stops and a cross displays, you must control the connection of the
serial cable between the Craft Terminal and the 1626 LM.
If necessary reconnect the serial cable correctly.
The Network Element Synthesis window is displayed.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
4-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to start the 1626 LM supervision.

Before you begin
The Network Element Synthesis window is displayed.

How to start the 1626 LM supervision
To start the 1626 LM supervision, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Map tab, select the 1626 LM to supervise.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Supervision>Start.
Result: The supervision of the selected 1626 LM starts.
The 1626 LM icon changes.

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
4-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to start the 1626 LM GUI.

Before you begin
The 1626 LM supervision is started.

How to start the 1626 LM GUI
To start the 1626 LM GUI, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Map window, select the 1626 LM to manage.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Supervision>Show Equipment.

Result: The login window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter your user name and password.

Important! The login entry is case-sensitive.
Result: The entry window of the 1626 LM GUI appears.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
4-5

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
You can manage the 1626 LM remotely from a 1353 M or locally from a PC equipped
with the Craft Terminal application.
Depending on whether you want to manage the 1626 LM remotely or locally, you must
set the Access State to specific status.
In normal operation, the 1353 M is the default manager. If you want to grant
management rights to the Craft Terminal application, you must enable this change from
the 1353 M.
Contents
4-7
4-8
4-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
4-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-1, Access State Icon Status (p. 4-7)describes the different status of the Access
State icon.
Table 4-1
Access State icon
Status
Description
Granted
The Craft Terminal application has the required

rights to manage the 1626 LM.
Denied
The 1353 M manages the 1626 LM.

The Craft Terminal application cannot manage the
1626 LM, but can access it for read only.
Requested
The Craft Terminal application is waiting for

management rights from the 1353 M. In the
meantime, the 1353 M continues to support:
Alarm handling
Performance processing on TP
Local Access management
ote: In any case, the 1353 M continues to support:
Alarm handling
Performance processing on TP
Local Access management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
4-7

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to set the Access State to the Craft Terminal application.
Before you begin
From the 1353 M, you have assigned LCA status to the 1626 Access State.
On the Craft Terminal application, the Access Status is Denied.
How to set the Access State to the Craft Terminal application
To set the Access State to the Craft Terminal application, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Supervision > Access State > Requested.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Yes.
Result: On the Craft Terminal application, the Access State changes from Denied to
Granted
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
4-8

Setting the Access State to the 1353 NM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Setting the Access State to the 1353 NM

Purpose
Use this procedure to set the Access State to the 1353 M.

Before you begin
On the Craft Terminal application, the Access State must be Granted.

How to set the Access State to the 1353 NM
To set the Access State to the 1353 M, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Supervision > Access State > OS...

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Yes.
Result: On the Craft Terminal application, the Access State changes from Granted to
Denied.
On the 1353 M, the Access State changes from LCA to Denied.

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
4-9
S5oftware Download
Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedures to follow when you want to download and activate
a software package.
Contents
5-2
5-4
Displaying Software Package Information
5-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
5-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to download a software package.

Before you begin
You must know the name of the software package to be downloaded.
You must know where the software package is stored.
You must have backuped your configuration before starting a download.
How to download a software package
To download a software package, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Download>Init download...

Result: The Software download initiate window appears.
If stored locally, the software package list is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, do the following:

1. In the Server filter field, enter the download server name.
2. In the Package filter field, enter the software package name to download.
3. Click Apply Filter(s).
Result: The available software package list is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the list, select the software package to download.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If appropriate, tick Forced to force the download to start from the beginning.
COMME T: This is specifically appropriate if you restart a download after a crash.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: A confirmation dialog box appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The Software Download in Progress (SWDL) window appears.
A download progress bar displays the download percentage of completion.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, click Abort to stop the download.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
5-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Close to finish.

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
5-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Use this procedure to activate a software package.
Before you begin
The required software package must be downloaded on the 1626 LM.

How to activate a software package
To activate a software package, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Download>Units info...

Result: The Software packages information window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the tab related to the software package to activate.

Result: The Current state must be Standby.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the corresponding list box, select Activate.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK to finish.
Result: An error message is displayed to inform that the communication links are
interrupted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Close all the current 1626 LM windows.

Result: The 1626 LM performs an automatic reboot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
After 1626 LM reboot, do the following:

1. Restart the supervision.
2. Select Supervision>Show Equipment.
Result: The 1626 LM GUI starts.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
5-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display software package information.

Before you begin
The software package must be downloaded on the 1626 LM.

How to display software package information
To display software package information, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Download>Units info...

Result: Tabs display information related to downloaded software packages
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant tab and click Sw units Det.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click + or - to expand or collapse information details.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Close to return to the list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK to finish.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
5-5
6 ommunication
C
Configuration
Overview
Purpose
Communication configuration consists in setting up all the necessary network addresses

and elements to enable the communication between the 1626 LM and the other network
elements. This chapter describes the procedures to perform when you want to declare the
required addresses and protocols to enable the 1626 LM to communicate with other
network elements or with network manager.
Contents
6-2
Common etwork Concepts
6-3
Local Area Addressing Parameters
6-4
6-6
6-7
6-9
LAPD Parameters
6-10
IP Tunnel Parameter
6-11
6-12
Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters
6-13
Setting Up the etwork Manager Address Associated to the 1626 LM
6-14
Identifying a etwork Element as a TP Server
6-15
Disabling A TP from the 1626 LM
6-16
6-17
6-18
Configuring IP Static Routes
6-19
Configuring LAPD
6-21
Managing OSI over IP
6-23
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-1

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Communication and Routing Management

Parameters
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the communication and routing parameters that you will have to
manage at 1626 LM commissioning.
Contents
Common etwork Concepts
6-3
6-4
6-6
6-7
6-9
LAPD Parameters
6-10
IP Tunnel Parameter
6-11
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-2

Common Network Concepts
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OSI
1626 LM communication is driven by the OSI reference model (Open System

Interconnection).
OSI is a network architecture model which relies, from top to bottom, on the 7 following
layers:
Layer 7: Application
Layer 6: Presentation
Layer 5: Session
Layer 4: Transport
Layer 3: etwork
Layer 2: Data
Layer 1: Physical
Each layer hosts one or several functions that provides/receives services to/from other
functions hosted by the immediate layer above or below. Communication from one layer
to another is done through selectors.
Selectors
A selector is a string which identifies a communication interface between two layers of

the OSI model.
In a 1626 LM configuration context, you need to manage following selectors:
Presentation selector (P Sel)
Session selector (S Sel)
Transport selector (T Sel)
etwork selector ( Sel)
Areas, Routing and System Type
At design stage, a network is divided into domains and sub-domains also called areas.
Areas hosts network elements. When a network element supports the routing function, it
is qualified as an IS (Intermediate System).
When routing occurs between IS of the same area, they are called Level 1 IS.
When routing occurs between IS of different areas, they are called Level 2 IS.
An IS may operate at level 1, level 2 or level 1 and level 2.

When an IS does not host the routing function, they are qualified as End Systems in the
sense that they can only send or receive data.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NSAP and Synonymous Area Addresses
The SAP ( etwork Service Access Point) address identifies a network element in a
given OSI area. A network element may have two different addresses depending on the
area it is viewed from. In this case the network element is assigned with multiple
synonymous area addresses.
In a 1626 LM configuration context, you need to complete the 3 following blocks:
AFI (Authority and Format Identifier)
AFI specifies the type and the format of the network address. AFI possible values are
given in NSAP Address Section in Table 6-1, 1626 LM Local Area Addressing
Parameters (p. 6-4).
Non labelled block
A string made of a header and the network area (4 last digits).

The header is driven by the AFI.
The combination of AFI and header part is always the same for all network elements
of a given WDM area.
System Id: according to the case, identifies a 1626 LM or a network manager (ie:
1353 M).
Nsel: identifies a user of a network service (layer 3).

Good to Know
Common etwork Concepts (p. 6-3)

Table 6-1, 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters (p. 6-4) describes the local area
address parameters.
Table 6-1

Possible
Values
Description
P Sel
0002
Presentation Selector
S Selector
00
Session Selector
T Sel
00
Transport Selector
Parameters
Local Address Section
NSAP Address Section
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-1
Parameters
Possible
Values
AFI
39
(continued)
Description
Authority and Format Identifier value for ISO-DCC
format
SAP address length must be 40 characters
47
Authority and Format Identifier value for

GOSIP-V2 format
SAP address length must be 40 characters
49
Authority and Format Identifier value for local

format
16 <= SAP address length <= 40 characters
Non labelled block
System Id
Driven by
AFI
If AFI = 39 or 47, Length must be 24 characters
Value made
of 12
hexadecimal
characters
A unique identifier of a node in a network area. By

default, it is set to the node or network manager
MAC address. Depending on the context, can be:
If AFI = 49, Length = 24 characters maximum
1626 LM id
Main network manager id
Spare network manager id
Once set, the System Id is definitively assigned.

N Sel
1D
(Default)
Identifies a user of a network service (layer 3).

In this context, the default value identifies the
transport layer.
Synonymous Area Address Section
Optional. If completed, System Id and N Sel must be identical to mandatory SAp address.
System Type Section
Intermediate system
level
L1
(Default)
The network element acts as a level 1 IS

(intermediate system).
It is strongly recommended to keep L1 default
value.
L2
The network element acts as a level 2 IS

(intermediate system).
End System
The network element acts as an end system.
See Also
Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters (p. 6-13)
Setting Up the etwork Manager Address Associated to the 1626 LM (p. 6-14)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TP ( etwork Time Protocol) is used for date and time synchronization among network
elements. In an Alcatel-Lucent network it is A TP (Alcatel TP) which is implemented
for date and time synchronization.
When A TP is enabled, you then need to identify what network element is the TP
server to enable the 1626 LM to synchronize with. The TP server can be a specific
network element or a network manager like the 1353 M.
ote: For high availability reasons, you may decide to have a redundant TP server.
In this case, you will have a main TP server and a spare TP server.
If A TP is not enabled, you can force the 1626 LM to take the date and time of the
network manager.
Table 6-2, TP Server etwork Address Parameters (p. 6-6) describes TP server
network address parameters.
Table 6-2
NTP Server Network Address Parameters
Parameters
Possible
Values
Description
NSAP Address Section

AFI
39

ISO-DCC format
Length must be 40 characters
47

GOSIP-V2 format
Length must be 40 characters
49
Authority and Format Identifier value for local

format
16 <= Length <= 40 characters
IDI
System Id
Driven by
AFI
If AFI = 39 or 47, Length must be 24 characters
Value made
of 12
hexadecimal
characters
A unique identifier of a node in a network area. By

default, it is set to the node or network manager
MAC address. Depending on the context, can be:
If AFI = 49, Length = 24 characters maximum
1626 LM id
Main network manager id
Spare network manager id
Once set, the System Id is definitively assigned.

NSel
7B
(Default)
Identifies a user of a network service (layer 3).

In this context, the default value identifies the time
synchronization application.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
Identifying a etwork Element as a TP Server (p. 6-15)
Disabling A TP from the 1626 LM (p. 6-16)
Forcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 M values (p. 6-17)

In the 1626 LM context, the Ethernet interface is supported by the RJ45 connector n2 of
the ESCT2000 board.
You need to configure this interface only if your 1626 LM has to connect with an
Ethernet network. Otherwise this task is not mandatory.
Table 6-3, Ethernet Interface Parameters (p. 6-7) describes Ethernet interface
parameters.
Table 6-3
Parameters
Possible
Values
Description
Ethernet Interface Section

Yes
Enables an Ethernet port.
No
Disables an Ethernet port.
MAC Address Section
Displays the MAC address of the Ethernet port of the ESCT2000 board.
Synonymous Section
Optional. If completed, must be identical to SAP address.

Network Protocol Section
OSI (Default)
Indicates the type of network supported by the Ethernet

port.
IP
In case of an OSI network, Ethernet port is automatically

detected by an IS-IS (Intermediate System-toIntermediate System) router.
OSI and IP
It is recommended to keep OSI as the default value.

OSI Section Section
L2 Only
L1 & L2 Default
Metric
Yes
The Ethernet port acts as a Level 2 IS-IS router only.
No
The Ethernet port acts as a Level 1 and 2 IS-IS router.
1 to 63
A value which is assigned to a link between 2 adjacent

routers. In the 1626 LM context, all the links have the
same default metric.
Default: 12
In case of optimization, the rule is: the lowest Default

Metric, the highest bandwidth.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-7

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-3
(continued)
Parameters
Possible
Values
Description
L1 & L2 Priority
0 to 127
Allocates a priority to a router. The router which has the

highest priority becomes the designated router.
Default: 1
Allocate a low priority to avoid the Ethernet port to

become a designated router.
With value 0, you are sure that the Ethernet port will
never be a designated router.
IP Section Section
The configuration of this section is not mandatory if you do not need to rely on an IP network
to access the network manager.

You must configure IP addressing parameters if:
You select IP or OSI and IP radio buttons in the Network Protocol section.
you want to rely on an IP tunnel to reach the network manager via an IP subnetwork.
IP Address
x.x.x.x
4 position
numerical
characters
Unique address that identifies a sender or a receiver of

packets in an IP etwork.
x= 0 to 255
IP Mask
x.x.x.x
The address used to divide the IP address into subnets.
4 position
numerical
characters
x= 0 to 255
IP Routing
Protocols
IS-IS
Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System protocol
OSPF
Open Shortest Path First protocol

( ot applicable for this current release)
RIP
Routing Information Protocol

( ot applicable for this current release)
None
Associated OSPF Section ( ot applicable for this current release)
See Also
Configuring the Ethernet Interface (p. 6-18)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Good to Know
Table 6-4, IP Routing Parameters (p. 6-9) describes the IP routing parameters.
You need to complete these parameters only for IP Tunnel configuration in case of
OSI tranport over IP.
Table 6-4
IP Routing Parameters
Parameters
Possible Values
Description
Destination Section (Enabled if check box is ticked)

x.x.x.x
4 position
numerical
characters
Unique address that identifies the network element that

the 1626 LM must reach via IP.
x= 0 to 255
Destination Network Section (Enabled if check box is ticked)
IP Address
x.x.x.x
Unique address that identifies the destination network.
4 position
numerical
characters
x= 0 to 255
IP Mask
x.x.x.x
4 position
numerical
characters
The address used to divide the destination network into

subnets.
x= 0 to 255
Default
Gateway IP
Address
x.x.x.x
4 position
numerical
characters
IP Address of the equipment enabling the inter-LA

communication.
Enabled if check box is checked.
x= 0 to 255
CLNP Tunnel
ot applicable for this current release.
IP Point to Point
Interface Id
ot applicable for this current release.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
Configuring IP Static Routes (p. 6-19)
LAPD Parameters
LAPD (Link Access Protocol - channel D) is a point-to-point protocol that can be
activated if you decide to transport the supervision via the optical fiber rather than the
TM (Telecommunication Management etwork).
As LAPD is a point-to-point protocol, each end-point has a specific role. If one end-point
is declared User, the other end-point is Network.
Table 6-5, LAPD Parameters (p. 6-10) describes LAPD parameters.
Table 6-5
LAPD Parameters
Parameters
Possible
Values
Description
LAPD Creation (Point to Point creation under OTS)

OTS Instance
LAPD Role
List of OTS
blocks attached
to an OSCU
board.
Each item of the list corresponds to an OSCU port.
Network
The role of one of the two LAPD end-points.
You can activate LAPD on 2 OSCU ports maximum.
If one end-point is declared as being Network, the other

must be User.
User
The role of one of the two LAPD end-points.

If one end-point is declared as being Network, the other
must be User.
OSC Byte
Configuration
D1 - D3
D4 - D12
The bytes which transport the supervision signal within

the supervision frame.
D1-D3 bytes are typically used for supervision
transport between adjacent nodes (regeneration

section). Rate is 192 Kbps.
These bytes are configured for any type of nodes.
D4-D12 bytes are typically used for supervision
transport between nodes which terminate

multiplexing section. Rate is 576 Kbps.
These bytes are configured only for Line Terminals
and xOADM nodes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-10

LAPD Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
Configuring LAPD (p. 6-21)
IP Tunnel Parameter
IP tunnel is required when you want to reach the network manager via an IP subnetwork.
The following table describes the IP tunnel parameter.
Parameter
Possible Value
Description
IP Tunnel
Address
x.x.x.x
IP address of the remote machine where IP

communication terminates.
4 position
numerical
characters
x= 0 to 255
Depending on your network design, can be the

network manager or a router.
Note 1: The IP tunnel becomes effective when you
have set E IP address at network manager or at

relevant router. Once these two addresses assigned,
the IP tunnel is considered as a Point-To-Point link
by the IS-IS router.
Note 2: If you want to have a spare IP tunnel, click
New to enable a new tab where you can set a new IP
tunnel address.
See Also
Managing OSI over IP (p. 6-23)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-11

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes all the required procedures to be performed when you want to set
or to update 1626 LM communication and routing parameters.
Contents
6-13
Setting Up the etwork Manager Address Associated to the 1626 LM
6-14
Identifying a etwork Element as a TP Server
6-15
Disabling A TP from the 1626 LM
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
Configuring LAPD
6-21
6-23
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-12

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare the 1626 LM network addresses.

Before you begin
You must know all the network identifiers of the 1626 LM,
The 1626 LM GUI is started.
How to set up the 1626 LM Network address
To set up 1626 LM network addresses, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Comm/Routing>Local Configuration menu.

Result: The Local Address area window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-1, 1626 LM Local Area
Addressing Parameters (p. 6-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK to finish.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Table 6-1, 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters (p. 6-4)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-13

Setting Up the Network Manager Address Associated to
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the 1626 LM
Setting Up the Network Manager Address Associated to the

1626 LM
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare the network manager address which supervise the 1626 LM.
Good to Know

Before you begin
You must know all the network identifiers of the network manager,
How to set up the Network Manager Address associated to the 1626 LM
To set up the network manager address associated to the 1626 LM, perform the following
steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Comm/Routing>OS Configuration menu.

Result: The OS Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-1, 1626 LM Local Area
Addressing Parameters (p. 6-4)for the Main OS Address area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK to finish.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-14

Identifying a Network Element as a NTP Server
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identifying a Network Element as a NTP Server

Purpose
Use this procedure to identify a etwork Element as a TP server.

Before you begin
You must know all the network identifiers of the selected network element.
How to identify a Network Element as a NTP Server
To identify a etwork Element as a TP server, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Comm/Routing>NTP Server Configuration.

Result: The
TP Server Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Enabling NTP protocol area, click Yes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-2, TP Server etwork
Address Parameters (p. 6-6) for the Main NTP server Address area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If applicable, set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-2, TP Server
etwork Address Parameters (p. 6-6) for the Spare NTP server Address area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK to finish.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Time Synchronization Parameters (p. 6-6)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-15

Disabling ANTP from the 1626 LM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disabling ANTP from the 1626 LM

Purpose
Use this procedure to disable A TP from the 1626 LM.

Before you begin

How to disable ANTP from the 1626 LM
To disable A TP from the 1626 LM, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Comm/Routing>NTP Server Configuration.

Result: The NTP Server Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Enabling NTP protocol area, select No.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK to finish.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-16

Forcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 NM values
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Forcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 NM values

Purpose
Use this procedure to force the 1626 LM date and time with the 1353 M values.
Before you begin
A TP is disabled.
How to force the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 NM values
To force the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 M values, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>NE Time.

Result: The
E Time window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Set NE Time with OS Time area, click Set.

Result: The 1626 LM local clock takes the 1353
M date and time values as
references.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In case of multirack configuration, restart the 1626 LM.

ote: The restart guarantees a complete synchronization across the racks.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-17

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to assign the required values to the Ethernet parameters
Before you begin
The ESCT2000 board must be plugged in the master rack and configured.
How to configure the Ethernet Interface
To configure the Ethernet interface, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Comm/Routing>Interfaces Configuration>Ethernet

Configuration.
Result: The Ethernet Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Ethernet Interface area, click Yes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-3, Ethernet Interface
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply to validate the configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The 1626 LM restarts automatically.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
ote: If you have configured the IP addressing parameters, you must configure the IP
static routing parameters.
See Also
Table 6-3, Ethernet Interface Parameters (p. 6-7)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-18

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
You must perform this procedure if:
OSI over IP is implemented,

etwork manager is not located into the same area as you E.
Before you begin
Check that:
OSI over IP is implemented.

etwork manager is not located into the same area as you E.
You have configured the IP addressing parameters of the ESCT2000 board.
How to configure IP Static Routes
To configure IP static routes, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>IP Configuration>IP Static Routing Configuration.

Result: The IP Static Routing Configuration window is displayed
To create a new IP static route, go to Step 2.
To modify an existing IP static route, go to Step 3.
To delete an existing IP static route, go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create a new IP static route, click New and perform the following steps:
1. Set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-4, IP Routing Parameters
(p. 6-9).
2. Click Apply to validate the configuration.
3. Restart the 1626 LM to take into account the new configuration.
4. Go to Step 5 in How to configure the Ethernet Interface (p. 6-18).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify an existing IP static route, select the relevant tab and perform the following
steps:
1. Set the new values to the required parameters as described in Table 6-4, IP Routing
2. Click Apply to validate the configuration.
4. Go to Step 5 in How to configure the Ethernet Interface (p. 6-18).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-19

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To delete an existing IP static route, select the relevant tab and perform the following
steps:
1. click Delete.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Table 6-3, Ethernet Interface Parameters (p. 6-7)
Table 6-4, IP Routing Parameters (p. 6-9)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-20

Configuring LAPD
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring LAPD
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure LAPD on your 1626 LM.

Before you begin
OSCU board is declared and cabled.

How to configure LAPD
To configure LAPD, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Comm/Routing>Interface Configuration>LAPD Configuration.

Result: The LAPD Configuration window is displayed.
To create LAPD for a new OTS or OTU point, go to step 2).
To modify LAPD configuration for an existing OTS, go to step 3).
To delete LAPD configuration from an existing OTS, go to step 4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create LAPD for a new OTS or OTU point, perform the following steps:
1. In the LAPD Creation area, click an OTS point reference.
2. Click the relevant LAPD role for this OTS point.
3. In the OSC byte Configuration list, click on the relevant transport bytes identification.
4. Click Create.
5. The LAPD configuration information is displayed in LAPD Configuration area.
6. End of configuration. Go to Step 5 in How to configure the Ethernet Interface
(p. 6-18).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify LAPD configuration for an existing OTS point, perform the following steps:
In the LAPD Configuration area, click an OTS point reference.

The Modify button is activated.
In the LAPD Role area, click the relevant LAPD role for this OTS point.
Click Modify.
End of modification. Go to Step 5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To delete LAPD configuration from an existing OTS point, perform the following steps:
1. In the LAPD Configuration area, click an OTS point reference.
The Delete button is activated.
2. Click Delete.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-21

Configuring LAPD
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
LAPD Parameters (p. 6-10)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-22

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to create or delete an IP tunnels which transport OSI
packets via an IP tunnel.
Before you begin
You must have previously configured:
the E IP address
the Ethernet interface with OSI and IP enabled
at least one static route
How to create an IP tunnel
To create IP tunnels, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Comm/Routing>Tunneling Configuration>OSI over IP.

Result: The OSI over IP Tunneling Configuration window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, click New to create a new IP tunnel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the IP address of the remote machine where IP communication terminates.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, repeat from Step 2.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
IP Tunnel Parameter (p. 6-11)
Configuring the Ethernet Interface (p. 6-18)
Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters (p. 6-13)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-23

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How to delete an IP tunnel
To delete an IP tunnel, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
IP Tunnel Parameter (p. 6-11)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
6-24
7 atabase Backup and

D
Restore
Overview
Purpose
The MIB (Management Information Base) is the database which stores all the
configuration information and processes to be executed by the 1626 LM.
The MIB is the database that you must save on a regular basis.
This chapter describes the procedures to follow when you want to:
backup and restore the MIB,
manage the MIB files.
Contents
7-2
When to Backup?
7-2
When to Restore?
7-2
Managing the MIB
7-3
Backing Up the MIB
7-4
Restoring the MIB
7-5
Deleting the MIB
7-7
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
7-1

When to Backup?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

When to Backup?
Backup creation is basically performed after the following events:
installation,
version change.
Installation
Installation corresponds to the initial introduction of programs and configuration data in

the 1626 LM.
Version Change
Version change corresponds to a change of software providing new services compared to

the previous version.
Operation Context
In your daily operation context and according to your data security standards, you should
plan to backup the MIB on a regular basis. Choose the time which will have the lowest
impact on the traffic. With this type of backup, you can restore your configuration with
the minimum loss of data.
See Also
Backing Up the MIB (p. 7-4)
When to Restore?
Backup restoration consists of restoring a MIB from a backup file.
The following lists the main restoration cases:
Replacement of an ESCT board,
Return to a previous operation configuration,
A MIB restore must be performed only if there is serious software and/or hardware
problems and if normal troubleshooting actions have not solved the problem.
See Also
Restoring the MIB (p. 7-5)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
7-2
Managing the MIB

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing the MIB

Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the MIB management procedures:

Contents
Backing Up the MIB
7-4
Restoring the MIB
7-5
Deleting the MIB
7-7
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
7-3
Managing the MIB

Backing Up the MIB
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backing Up the MIB

Purpose
Use the procedure to back up the MIB.

Before you begin
1626 LM GUI is started.

How to backup the MIB
To backup the MIB, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Download>MIB management.

Result: The
E MIB management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In Backup name field, enter a name for your MIB backup.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Backup.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The backup starts.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Result: The backup process continues.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait until the successful backup message is displayed and click Cancel.
Result: The NE MIB management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Backup name field, the name of the recent MIB backup file is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
7-4
Managing the MIB

Restoring the MIB
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Restoring the MIB

Purpose
Use this procedure to restore the MIB.

Before you begin
Read the Database and Local Configuration Maintenance chapter of the 1626 LM
Maintenance and Trouble Clearing Guide to know in what context the MIB
restoration takes place.
LAPD must be deactivated.
How to restore the MIB
To restore the MIB, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Available Backups on local server list, select the relevant backup file to
restore.
Result: In the Backup name field, the name of the selected MIB backup file is
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Restore.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The restoration starts.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Result: The restoration process continues.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait until the successful message is displayed and click Cancel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the MIB to restore and click Activate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
7-5
Managing the MIB

Restoring the MIB
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK to confirm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait until the successful restoration message is displayed and click Cancel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
ote: After activation, the 1626 LM performs an automatic reboot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
7-6
Managing the MIB

Deleting the MIB
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deleting the MIB

Purpose
Use this procedure to delete the MIB.

Before you begin
one.
How to delete the MIB
To delete the MIB, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Available Backups on local server list, select the relevant backup file to delete.
Result: In the Backup name field, the name of the selected MIB backup file is
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The deletion starts.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait until the successful deletion message is displayed and click Cancel.
Result: The
E MIB management appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
7-7
8 acks and Subracks

R
Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains:
how to display 1626 LM racks and subracks,
how to manage the declaration of 1626 LM racks and subracks.
Contents
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
Managing Racks
8-7
Declaring a Rack
8-8
8-10
8-11
8-12
Managing Subracks
8-13
Declaring a Subrack
8-14
8-15
Setting a Subrack Out Of Service
8-16
8-17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-1

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic explains how to display the different graphical representation of the 1626 LM
hardware.
Contents
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-2

Displaying the General Overview of the 1626 LM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware

Purpose
Use this procedure to display the general overview of the 1626 LM hardware.
Before you begin

How to display the general overview of the 1626 LM hardware
To display the general overview of the 1626 LM hardware, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Views>Show Equipment.

Result:
EN
The Equipment View window is displayed.
The master rack and possible associated secondary rack are displayed.
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display the 1626 LM rack view.

Before you begin
The Equipment View window is displayed.

How to display the rack view
To display the rack view, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Double click on a rack.

Result:
EN
The rack view appears and displays the associated subracks.
The associated subracks can be configured or empty.
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display the 1626 LM subrack view.

Before you begin
The Rack View window is displayed.

How display the subrack view
To display the subrack view, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Double click on a subrack.

Result: The subrack view appears and displays the associated boards and empty slots.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display the details of a selected board.

Before you begin
The Subrack View window is displayed.

How to display the board view
To display the board view, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Double click on a board.

Result: The board view appears and displays the following:
EN
board administrative state,
board alarms,
depending on the board type:
specific configuration information,
XFP (eXtended Form Factor Pluggable) or SFP (Small Form Factor Pluggable)
modules,
ports with status In Service.
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-6
Managing Racks
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing Racks
Overview
Purpose
This topic explains how to manage rack declaration.

Contents
Declaring a Rack
8-8
8-10
8-11
8-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-7
Managing Racks
Declaring a Rack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Declaring a Rack
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare a new rack.

Before you begin
The Rack View window is displayed,
The rack slot is empty.
Good to Know
To declare a compact rack for first time, you need to:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Declare a generic rack as described in the procedure below.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the rack out of service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Undeclare/remove the rack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform the compact rack declaration as described in the procedure below.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
How to declare a rack
To declare a rack, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click an empty rack slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Equipment>Set.
Result: The Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Untick Actual Equipment only.

Result: The list of available rack types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Allowed Equipment Types area, select the rack type.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-8
Managing Racks
Declaring a Rack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the dialog box, click OK.

Result:
EN
The rack representation appears.
The rack operational status is In Service.
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-9
Managing Racks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to set a rack in service.

Before you begin
The rack operational status is Out of Service.
How to set a rack in service
To set a rack in service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the rack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Equipment>Set in Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the dialog box click OK.

Result: The rack operational status becomes In Service.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-10
Managing Racks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to set a rack out of service.

Before you begin
The rack operational status is In Service.
How to set a rack out of service
To set a rack out of service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the rack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Equipment>Set out of Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The rack operational status becomes Out of Service.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-11
Managing Racks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure to undeclare a rack.

Before you begin
All the subracks have been undeclared/removed.
The shelf operational status is Out of Service.
How to undeclare a rack
To undeclare a rack, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the rack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Equipment>Remove.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The rack disappears from the shelf view.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-12
Managing Subracks
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing Subracks
Overview
Purpose
This topic explains how to manage subrack declaration.

Contents
Declaring a Subrack
8-14
8-15
8-16
8-17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-13
Managing Subracks
Declaring a Subrack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Declaring a Subrack
Purpose
Use this procedure to declare a new subrack.

Before you begin

How to declare a subrack
To declare a subrack, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click an empty subrack slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Allowed Equipment Types area, select the subrack type.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the dialog box, click OK.

Result:
EN
The subrack representation appears.
The subrack operational status is In Service.
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-14
Managing Subracks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to set a subrack in service.

Before you begin
The subrack operational status is Out of Service.
How to set a subrack in service
To set a subrack in service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the subrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Equipment>Set in Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The subrack operational status becomes In Service.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-15
Managing Subracks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to set a subrack out of service.

Before you begin
The subrack operational status is In Service.
How to set a subrack out of service
To set a subrack out of service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the subrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Equipment>Set out of Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The subrack operational status becomes Out of Service.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-16
Managing Subracks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure to undeclare a subrack.

Before you begin
The Subrack View window is displayed.
All the boards have been undeclared/removed.
The subrack operational status is Out of Service.
How to undeclare a subrack
To undeclare a subrack, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the subrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The subrack disappears from the rack view.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
8-17
9 oard and SFP/XFP

B
Module Management
Overview
Purpose
Boards are the hardware components which host the functions delivered by the 1626 LM.
For connectivity reasons, boards can be enhanced with hot swappable optical transceivers
called SFP (Small Form Factor Pluggable) or XFP (eXtended Form Factor Pluggable)
modules.
This chapter explains how to manage boards and SFP/XFP modules.
Contents
9-4
About the Provisioning Process
9-4
About ETHC Configurations
9-5
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-19
9-20
Declaring TRBD Boards
9-22
Declaring TRBC boards
9-26
Declaring OSCU Supervision Boards
9-29
9-31
Declaring OMDX Boards
9-33
9-35
9-36
9-38
Declaring BOFA Amplifier Boards
9-40
9-42
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-1
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-44
Declaring OADC boards
9-46
9-47
9-49
9-51
9-53
9-53
9-55
Laser Power Configuration Parameters
9-62
9-64
9-65
LOFA11xx APSD Parameters
9-68
9-69
Configuring Boards
9-73
9-74
9-75
9-77
9-78
9-79
9-80
9-81
9-82
Configuring TRBx Shutdown Criteria
9-83
9-84
9-85
9-86
9-87
Configuring ALCT Working Mode
9-88
9-90
Configuring TDMX 1180 Port Profile
9-91
9-92
9-93
Configuring WMA 1100 Equalization Parameter
9-94
Configuring Channels on WMA 3x74 boards
9-95
9-96
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-2
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Setting a Board In Service
9-97
9-98
9-99
9-100
9-101
9-102
9-103
9-104
9-105
9-106
Activating Firmware
9-107
9-107
Activating Firmware
9-108
9-109
Laser Control Parameters
9-109
9-111
9-113
9-113
9-115
9-116
9-117
Managing External Output Points
9-118
9-119
Filtering External Output Points
9-120
9-121
Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM without

OMSP
9-122
Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM with

OMSP
9-124
Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM
9-126
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board installation and declaration is necessary but not sufficient to perform a complete
provisioning process.
Important! Board declaration is not applicable when board insertion triggers an
automatic provisioning.
The following describes the step by step provisioning process:
1. Declare boards.
Important: This step is not applicable when board insertion triggers an automatic
provisioning
2. If applicable, declare SFP/XFP modules.
3. Set the connectors in service.
4. If applicable, set the board generic and/or specific parameters.
5. For each board to connect, declare cabling between the relevant connectors.
6. Update transmission.
7. If necessary, create cross connections.
8. End.
See Also
Declaring/Undeclaring Boards (p. 9-12)
Board Configuration Parameters (p. 9-53)
Configuring Boards (p. 9-73)
Setting Boards In/Out of Service (p. 9-96)
Managing SFP/XFP Modules (p. 9-99)
Activating Firmware (p. 9-107)
Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board Laser (p. 9-109)
Managing External Points (p. 9-113)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ETHC Basic Concept
An ETHC board aggregates Gigabit Ethernet channels at 1 Gbps rate into optical lines at
10 Gbps rate.
It can be connected either to a TRBD1191 transponder or to an XFP module before to
connect to a Mux/Demux.
Depending on the configuration modes, the ETHC board enables:
Up to 12 channels at 1 Gps rate on the User/Client side,
Up to 2 optical lines at 10 Gps rate on the line to MUX side.
The following figure illustrates the basic concept of an ETHC.

Figure 9-1 ETHC Basic Concept
The following figure illustrates an example of how an ETHC can interface with a
TRBD1191.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 9-2 Example of ETHC-TRBD1191 connection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETHC Configuration Modes
Depending on your network design, you can configure the ETHC into different
configuration modes. As a consequence, you will have access to different level of
resources as explained in the following table:
If you configure the ETHC in...
You can...
Concentration Mode
use the following resources:
Up to 9 User-Client channels numbered

from 51 to 59.
These numbers are automatically assigned
and cannot be changed.
One 10 Gbps optical line labelled L13.

L13 supports 9 User-Client channels.
connect the ETHC to one of the following:
Add & Drop Mode
a TRBD1191 board via the backplane
an XFP module
use the following resources:
Up to 12 User-Client channels which

numbers can be picked up in the following
range: 100 to 999
Two optical lines labelled L13 and L14.

Each of these two lines supports a
maximum of 9 User-Client channels.
In case of migration from Concentrator

mode to Add & Drop mode , you can:
Keep the existing channels numbered from

51 to 59, as Add & Drop channels. For any
circumstances, you want to redesign the
way your services are handled, you may
need to delete these existing cross
connections and to create new ones.
Implement the new channels by picking

the channel numbers from the range: 100
to 999.
ATTENTION: You cannot change your
configuration from Add & Drop mode to

Concentration mode.
The following figures illustrate the ETHC concept in the context of the different
configuration modes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-7

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 9-3 Illustration of an ETHC in Concentration Mode
Figure 9-4 Illustration of an ETHC in Add & Drop Mode
ETHC Working in a Concentration Mode
To configure an ETHC in a concentration mode, you must perform the following:

1. Depending on your node configuration:
to connect ETHC line toward MUX via XFP module, or
to connect User-Client traffic to TRBD1191 line module.
2. to set the specific CONF_MODE parameter to Concentrator_Auto.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To connect User-Client channels to line modules, you must establish cross connections
via functional blocks from the transmission view as follows:
If you want to connect
...
Then, cross connection is

...
And you connect the

following TP ...
ETHC line to ETHC XFP

line
Mandatory
port#13 - RsTTP
Operator responsibility
to
port#13 - OCH
ETHC line to TRBD1191

line
For information only:
ETHC User-Client channels

to ETHC line
Depending on node
configuration
ETHC port#13 - RsTTP
Operator responsibility
TRBD1191 port#101 - ODU2
Automatic
For information only:
ot operator
configurable
OCHgdc port
to
to
RSgdc port
See Also
Managing Cross Connections (p. 12-7)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETHC Working in an Add & Drop Mode
To configure an ETHC in an Add & Drop mode, you must perform the following:
1. Depending on your node configuration:
to connect ETHC line toward MUX via XFP module, or
to connect ETHC line to TRBD1191 line module.
2. to set the specific CONF_MODE parameter to AddDrop_Manual.

3. to manage channel connections via the VLAN Cross Connection Management
window.
ATTENTION: You cannot change the configuration mode from AddDrop_Manual to
Concentrator_Auto without de-provisioning the board.
See Also
Table 9-15, ETHC Configuration Mode Parameters Table (p. 9-58)
Configuring ETHC Working Mode (p. 9-74)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-10

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TRBD1191 Basic Concept
A TRBD1191 board is an interface between WDM network and User-Client networks.

User-Client channels are processed through an XFP connection module which is called
User-Client XFP.
Channels to WDM network are transported via TRBD1191 line through a connection
matrix.
Figure 9-5, TRBD1191 Basic Concept (p. 9-11) illustrates TRBD1191 basic concepts.
Figure 9-5 TRBD1191 Basic Concept
TRBD1191 Cross Connections
To connect User-Client channels to line module, you must establish a cross connection
between port#1 - OCH and port#101 - ODU2.
To know how to create a cross connection, refer to Creating Cross Connections
(p. 12-10).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-11
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes all the required procedures and parameters to declare or undeclare
1626 LM boards.
Contents
9-13
9-19
9-20
9-22
9-26
9-29
9-31
9-33
9-35
9-36
9-38
9-40
9-42
9-44
9-46
9-47
9-49
9-51
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following tables give an overview of the main characteristics of transponder and
Mux/Demux boards.
Table 9-1
Transponder Models
TRBD4612
TRBD4412
Features
40 Gbps rate, P-DPSK
50 GHz grid
3 slots wide
U I/G.709 compliant
STM-256/OC-768 User-Client
Fully tunable over 80 channels of C band
Less than 83 W power consumption
1+1 OS CP protection
Embedded TDCM
PMDC to enhance performances w/ poor PMD

fibers. Implemented as an external board.
Compliant with mux/demux CMDX1012 (8

channels, 50 GHz)
40 Gbps rate, DPSK
100 GHz grid
3 slots wide
U I/G.709 compliant
STM-256/OC-768 User-Client
Embedded TDCM


channels, 100 GHz)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-13
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-1
(continued)
Transponder Models
Features
TRBD1191
TRBD1191 general characteristics:
10 Gbps rate, RZ
I-64.1/S-64.2b/10GBASE S/P1L1-2D2 User

Interface
50 GHz grid
1 slot wide
G.709 compliant
STM-64/OC-192 CBR at 9,95 Gbps/OTU2/10 GbE

WA / 10 GbE LA User-Client
Fully tunable over 96 channels of C+ band

channels, 50 GHz)
Specific MLSE characteristics:
TRBD1131
50 GHz grid / Frequency range from 191.700 THz to

196.000 THz
Up to 46 W power consumption (Maximum number

of units per shelf: 14)
High PMD tolerance
10 Gbps rate, RZ
LR User Interface
50 GHz grid
1 slot wide
G.709 compliant
10 GbE LA User-Client

channels, 50 GHz)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-1
Transponder Models
TRBD1121
TRBD1111
(continued)
Features
10 Gbps rate, RZ
S-64.2b User Interface
50 GHz grid
1 slot wide
G.709 compliant

WA User-Client

channels, 50 GHz)
10 Gbps rate, RZ
I-64.1 User Interface
50 GHz grid
1 slot wide
G.709 compliant

WA User-Client

channels, 50 GHz)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-15
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-2
Concentrator Models
TRBC4612
TRBC4412
Features
40 Gbps rate WDM side, P-DPSK
4x10 Gbps rate User-Client side, XFP pluggable

mode
50 GHz grid
3 slots wide
U I/G.709 compliant
STM-64/OC-192 CBR at 9,95 Gbps/10GbE LA

User-Client
Embedded TDCM


channels, 50 GHz)
40 Gbps rate WDM side, DPSK
4x10 Gbps rate User-Client side, XFP pluggable

mode
50 GHz grid
3 slots wide
U I/G.709 compliant
STM-64/OC-192 CBR at 9,95 Gbps/10GbE LA

User-Client
Embedded TDCM


channels, 50 GHz)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-2
Concentrator Models
Features
TRBC1111
Table 9-3
(continued)
10 Gbps rate WDM side, RZ
4x2.5 Gbps User-Client side, SFP Pluggable
I-16/S-16.1/L-16.1/L-16.2/Generic SFP User

Interface
50 GHz grid
1 slot wide
G.709 compliant
STM-16/OC-48 CBR at 2.48 Gbps User-Client

channels, 50 GHz)
Mux/Demux Models and Features
Mux/Demux Models
Features
OMDX 4100
4 channels in C band, 100 GHz grid
OMDX 8100
8 channels in L1, L2, S1 or S2 band, 100 GHz grid
OMDX 8100_L1_X
8 channels in L1 band, 100 GHz grid, expansion

capacity
CMDX 1010
8 channels in C+ band, 50 GHz grid
CMDX 1012
CMDX 1052
BMDX 1100
12 bands of 7 channels in C+ band, 50 GHz grid
BMDX 1000
12 bands of 8 channels in C+ band, 50 GHz grid
Table 9-4
OMDX Specificities
OMDX Models
Band Id
Multiplexed Frequency Range (GHz) 100

GHz Grid
OMDX 8100
L2
192000 to 192800 (exception: 192400)
L1
193000 to 193800 (exception: 193400)
S2
194200 to 195000 (exception: 194600)
S1
195200 to 196000 (exception: 195600)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-4
OMDX Specificities
(continued)
OMDX Models
Band Id
Multiplexed Frequency Range (GHz) 100

GHz Grid
OMDX 4100
20-23
192000 to 192300
25-28
192500 to 192800
30-33
193000 to 193300
35-38
193500 to 193800
42-45
194200 to 194500
47-50
194700 to 195000
52-55
195200 to 195500
57-60
195700 to 196000
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare OCPU protection boards.

Before you begin
You know the slot dedicated to OCPU board.
You know the TRBx to be protected by the OCPU board.
Subrack View window is displayed.
How to declare OCPU protection board
To declare OCPU protection boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on a subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on an empty slot between slot#11 and slot#18.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.

Result: The list of all board types appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Allowed Equipment Types area, click on the relevant board type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The OCPU board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
service (Red padlock).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Post-Declaration Task
To activate the protection, you must perform cabling declaration between the OCPU
board and the two TRBx to protect.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-19
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare the following boards:
ESCT 2000,
ESCT 1000,
PSUP 1000,
RAIU 1000,
FA S 1000,
USIB 1000.
Good to Know
If the board is
a ...
Then, board name is ...
And possible
subrack slot#
are ...
Control board
ESCT 2000
For the current release, ESCT 2000 is mandatory in a

master shelf and may be installed in secondary shelves.
ESCT 1000
This board can be installed in secondary shelves only,

with specific engineering rules.
ESCT 1000 is prohibited as soon as WMA , TDMX and
ETHC boards are implemented.
Power Supply
board
PSUP 1000
21 and 40
Rack Alarm
board
RAIU 1000
22 and 39
Fan board
FANS 1000
41
User Interface
board
USIB 1000
From 23 to 38
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-20
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Before you begin

How to declare Control and Service boards
To declare control and service boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on an empty slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The board appears in the subrack view with operational state In Service (Red
padlock).
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare TRBD boards.

Before you begin
In case of protection mechanisms:
You know the slot and the associated role of the TRBD (main or spare).
You know the slot of the OCPU in charge of protection management.

CAUTION: At board plugging, you must check that Rx input power at User-Client
and WDM side does not exceed the maximum acceptable values. This measure is
relevant ONLY IF the related channel is present. This check is mandatory to
prevent any damage for the WDM receiver.
The following tables indicate the maximum acceptable input power per TRBD board.
Table 9-5
TRBD4xxx Maximum Acceptable Input Power

TRBD4xxx Maximum Acceptable Input Power
User-Client Side
WDM Side
+3 dBm
Table 9-6
+5 dBm
TRBD4312 Maximum Acceptable Input Power
TRBD4312 Maximum Acceptable Input Power
User-Client Side
WDM Side
+3 dBm
Table 9-7
+5 dBm
Interface Type
I-64.1
User-Client Side
WDM Side
+0.5 dBm
S-64.2b
-1 dBm
10GBASE S
-2 dBm
Caution:
For TRBD1191 MLSE: -6 dBm
For other TRBD1x9z: Refer to

the value noticed on the front
panel sticker. If no sticker: +2
dBm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-22
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-8

Interface Type
y=1
User-Client Side
WDM Side
+0.5 dBm
(VSR/I-64.1
module)
y=2 and 4
Refer to the value noticed on the

front panel sticker. If no sticker: +2
dBm
-1 dBm
(S-64.2b
module)
y=3
+0.5 dBm
(10GBASE LR)
How to declare TRBD boards
To declare TRBD boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Allowed Equipment Types area, click on the relevant TRBD model.
Result: The Channel Configuration and Grid, Band and Interface Configuration
areas appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Channel Configuration area, click on the relevant frequency.

Result:
The selected frequency is displayed on the left.
In the Grid, Band and Interface Configuration area, the associated grid and
network interface are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-23
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For TRBD1xyz, select the relevant interface:
UNI: for a User to
NNI: for a
etwork Interface.
etwork to etwork Interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the State of the Line area, select the required Line State.
Line State to On enables the optical interface (Emission/Reception).
Line State to Off disables the optical interface (Emission/Reception).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The TRBD board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Good to know
A RUP alarm may appear during approximately 1 minute.
Line State management have the following consequences:

If Line State is set to ...
ON
Then ...
Force LOSS parameters is set to

Un-Activated.
APSD Control is set to Disable.
The reception interface and the laser are enabled.

To change these parameter values refer to:
Configuring TRBx Transmission
Parameters (p. 9-82),
Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC
Boards Laser (p. 9-111).
OFF
Force LOSS parameters is set to Activated.

APSD Control is set to Laser Forced Off.
The reception interface and the laser are disabled.

Post-Declaration Tasks
1. If necessary, set the specific parameters.

2. Set the connectors and cabling in service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-24
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For 40 Gbps transponders, you can set the WDM line connector in service only
if:
a. WDM Module output connector is in service.
b. VOA input connector is in service.
c. Cabling between WDM Module output connector and VOA input or BOFA input
is declared.
ote: Any action on Tributary connections at physical or configuration level,
requires SPLM synchronization.
See Also
Table 9-12, TRBx Transmission Parameters Table (p. 9-55)
Table 9-24, TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table (p. 9-64)
Laser Power Configuration Parameters (p. 9-62)
Chapter 13, Connector and Cabling Management,
Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters (p. 9-82)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-25
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare TRBC boards.

Before you begin
In case of protection mechanisms:
You know the slot and the associated role of the TRBC (main or spare).
You know the slot of the OCPU in charge of protection management.

CAUTION At board plugging, you must check that Rx input power at User-Client
and WDM side does not exceed the maximum acceptable values. This measure is
relevant ONLY IF the related channel is present. This check is mandatory to
prevent any damage for the WDM receiver.
Table 9-9

Interface Type
User-Client Side
WDM Side
10GBE WA
SW
0 dBm
10GBE LA SR
0 dBm
P1L1-2D2
+5 dBm
-7 dBm
How to declare TRBC boards
To declare TRBC boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Set Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Allowed Equipment Types area, click on the relevant TRBC model.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-26
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
areas appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The selected frequency is displayed on the left.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Grid, Band and Interface Configuration area, the relevant interface type for each
User /Client port is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the State of the Line area, select the required Line State.
Line State to On enables the optical interface (Emission/Reception).
Line State to Off disables the optical interface (Emission/Reception).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The TRBC board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Good to know
A RUP alarm may appear during approximately 1 minute.
Line State management have the following consequences:

ON
Then ...
Force LOSS parameters is set to

Un-Activated.
APSD Control is set to Disable.
The reception interface and the laser are enabled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-27
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then ...
OFF
Force LOSS parameters is set to Activated.

APSD Control is set to Laser Forced Off.
The reception interface and the laser are disabled.


For 40 Gbps transponders, you can set the WDM line connector in service only
if:
a. WDM Module output connector is in service.
b. VOA input connector is in service.
c. Cabling between WDM Module output connector and VOA input or BOFA input
is declared.
ote: Any action on Tributary connections at physical or configuration level,
requires SPLM synchronization.
See Also
Board Specific Configuration Parameters (p. 9-55)
Declaring a SFP/XFP Module (p. 9-101)
Setting a SFP/XFP Module In Service (p. 9-102)
Chapter 13, Connector and Cabling Management,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-28
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare OSCU supervision boards.

Before you begin
How to declare OSCU supervision boards
To declare OSCU supervision boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click on the relevant board type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In Type of Line area, select the relevant entry:
REPEATER
This option triggers the following:
OSCU clock is set to Receive Signal Clock.
For LAPD configuration, only D1-D3 bytes are enabled.
OTHERS:
This option triggers the following:
OSCU clock is set to Local Clock.
Full LAPD configuration is enabled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The OSCU board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-29
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-30
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare BMDX boards.

Before you begin
How to declare BMDX boards
To declare BMDX boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on a subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Set Equipment window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The BMDX board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-31
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
TRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features (p. 9-13)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-32
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare OMDX boards.

Before you begin
How to declare OMDX boards
To declare OMDX boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on an empty slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Channel Min&Max area, select the required frequency range.

ote: This step does not apply for OMDX8100_L1_X.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The OMDX board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-33
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
Table 9-4, OMDX Specificities (p. 9-17)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-34
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare CMDX boards.

Before you begin
How to declare CMDX boards
To declare CMDX boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Grid, Band and Interface Configuration area, select the required band.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The CMDX board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

See Also

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-35
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board.
Before you begin
You must declare the associated BMDX board before the ALCT board.
How to declare the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) board
To declare an ALCT board, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Allowed Equipment Types area, click on the relevant ALCT model.
areas appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result:
The selected frequency is displayed on the left.
In the Channel Configuration area, the following is displayed:
Grid: 400 GHz
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the frequency corresponding to the supported wavelength.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The ALCT board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-36
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

See Also
Laser Power Configuration Parameters (p. 9-62)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-37
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare LOFA11xx amplifiers.

Good to Know
By default, LOFA11xx boards are declared as a bidirectional amplifiers:
Stage 1 input and stage 2 output act as a bidirectional OTS port,
Stage 2 input and stage 1 output act as a bidirectional OTS port.
An unidirectional amplifier is a LOFA11xx board for which the first stage output has
been cabled with the second stage input.
LOFA11x0 inter-stage cabling is mandatory because it can be unidirectional only.
To use two unidirectional LOFA11xx boards as a bidirectional amplifier device, you

must set the contradirectionality between the two boards.
Contradirectionality is a specific Alcatel-Lucent concept. This concept designates a

link between two unidirectional amplifiers to build a bidirectional set.
4 LOFA11xx Repeater Configuration Special Case
For a repeater configuration which includes 4 LOFA11xx, you must carefully check that
the following is implemented:
The inter-stage cabling has been configured for each LOFA11xx.

The cabling has been configured as described in Figure 9-6, 4 LOFA11xx Repeater
Configuration (p. 9-38).
Contradirectionality is configured between Amplifier 1 and Amplifier 4,
Contradirectionality is configured between Amplifier 2 and Amplifier 3
Figure 9-6 4 LOFA11xx Repeater Configuration

Ampli 1
Contradir
Ampli4
Ampli 2
C
Contradir
ontradir
Ampli 3
Before you begin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-38
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How to declare Amplifier boards
To declare amplifier boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The LOFA11xx board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
1. If necessary, set the contradirectionality and power tuning parameters.

See Also
Table 9-11, Contradirectionality Parameters table (p. 9-54)
LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters (p. 9-65)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-39
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare BOFA amplifiers.

Before you begin
How to declare BOFA amplifier boards
To declare BOFA amplifier boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The BOFA board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
Service (Red padlock). According to the BOFA type, one or two gain blocks are set In
Service automatically.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
1. According to the configuration, declare required TRBx, BMDX or CMDX boards.

See Also
Declaring TRBD Boards (p. 9-22),

Declaring TRBC boards (p. 9-26),
Declaring BMDX Boards (p. 9-31),
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-40
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Declaring CMDX Boards (p. 9-35),
Chapter 13, Connector and Cabling Management.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-41
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare Ethernet boards.

Before you begin
How to declare Ethernet boards
To declare Ethernet boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click an empty slot between slot#3 and slot#18.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The Ethernet board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

2. Declare SFP/XFP module(s),
3. Activate the connectors and cabling.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-42
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
Declaring a SFP/XFP Module (p. 9-101)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-43
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare TDMX 1180 boards.

Before you begin
The TDMX 1180 board takes 4 consecutive slots. As a consequence, the selected
subrack must have enough consecutive empty slots to host a TDMX 1180 board.
How to declare TDMX 1180 boards
To declare TDMX 1180 boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The TDMX 1180 board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
1. Configure the port profiles (Specific parameters configuration),

2. Configure the port signal transmission,
3. Activate the connectors and cabling,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-44
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
Board Specific Configuration Parameters (p. 9-55),
TDMX and WMA Configuration Parameters (p. 9-69),
Chapter 13, Connector and Cabling Management.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-45
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare OADC boards.

Before you begin
How to declare OADC boards
To declare OADC boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The OADC board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
one.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-46
Declaring WMAN1100 Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to declare WMA 1100 boards.
Before you begin
The WMA 1100 board takes 3 consecutive slots. As a consequence, the selected
subrack must have enough consecutive empty slots to host a WMA 1100 board.
WMA 1100 declaration requires to understand what Contradirectionality concept is.

Contradirectionality is a specific Alcatel-Lucent concept. This concept designates a
link between two unidirectional boards to build a bidirectional set.
How to declare WMAN 1100 boards
To declare WMA 1100 boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click on WMAN 1100.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK to finish.
Result: The WMA 1100 board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-47
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary:
1. Configure provisioning parameters.
2. Configure laser power
3. Activate the connectors and cabling
4. Configure contradirectionality
See Also
Configuring WMA Laser Power (p. 9-80)
Configuring Contradirectionality (p. 9-86)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-48
Declaring WMAN 3x74 Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare WMA 3x74 boards.

Before you begin
The WMA 3x74 board takes 4 consecutive slots. As a consequence, the selected
subrack must have enough consecutive empty slots to host a WMA 3x74 board.
How to declare WMAN 31x74 boards
To declare WMA 3x74 boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click WMAN 3174 or WMAN 3374.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK to finish.
Result: The WMA 3x74 board appears in the subrack view with operational state In
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
If necessary:
1. Configure provisioning parameters.
2. Configure laser power
3. Activate the connectors and cabling
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-49
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-50
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure to undeclare boards.

Before you begin
This procedure does not apply to SFP/XFP modules.

To know how to undeclare a SFP/XFP module, refer to the relevant section.
Board operational status must be set to Out of Service.
For TRBx boards, perform the following:

1. Remove loopbacks, then
2. Delete cable configuration, then
3. Stop performance monitoring.
For BMDX boards, disconnect CMDX boards.
For CMDX boards, disconnect TRBD boards.
For OMDX boards, disconnect associated OMDX boards.
CAUTIO : Do not unplug a board during a firmware download (Hardware failure LED
in yellow). Otherwise the board will not restart and you will have to return it for
manufacturer repair.
Good to Know
For 40 Gbps transponder, you must follow the required sequence:

1. Set the User/Client and WDM line connectors out of service.
2. Delete the cabling between WDM Module output connector and VOA Input
connector.
To know how to delete the cabling between two connectors refer to Deleting the
Cabling between 2 Connectors (p. 13-5)
3. Set the VOA Input connector out of service.
4. Set the WDM module output connector out of service.
How to undeclare/remove boards
To undeclare/remove boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-51
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The board disappears from the subrack view.
An UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present) is raised if the board is still plugged into
the slot.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-52

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the required parameters and procedures to manage board
configuration.
Contents
9-53
9-55
9-62
9-64
9-65
9-68
9-69

Generic configuration parameters are associated to the following boards:
CMDX boards
CMDX generic configuration parameter is about the band associated to a CMDX

board.
LOFA11xx and WMAN1100 boards
LOFA and WMA 1100 generic configuration parameters are about

contradirectionality.
Contradirectionality is a specific Alcatel-Lucent concept.
This concept designates a link between two unidirectional boards to build a
bidirectional set.
An amplifier is unidirectional when the interstage cable links the first stage output to
the second stage input.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-53

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following tables describe CMDX, LOFA11xx and WMA 1100 boards generic
configuration parameters:
Table 9-10, CMDX Band Parameter Table (p. 9-54) is dedicated to CMDX band
parameter,
Table 9-11, Contradirectionality Parameters table (p. 9-54) is dedicated to
contradirectionality parameters.
Table 9-10
CMDX Band Parameter Table
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Band
The BMDX band# to which the

CMDX board is connected.
1 to 12
See Also
Configuring the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX Board (p. 9-87)
Table 9-11
Contradirectionality Parameters table
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Indicates the rack number which

hosts the related subrack.
Rack#,Subrack#andslot#
RRSBBP Contradirectional
Rack
Subrack
Indicates the subrack number which

hosts the board.
Slot
Indicates the slot number where the

board is plugged.
Enter Contradir
Enables the Rack, Subrack and Slot

fields.
Remove Contradir
Disables the Rack, Subrack and Slot

fields.
of the related board.
On/Off
See Also
Declaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards (p. 9-38)
Declaring WMA 1100 Boards (p. 9-47)
Configuring Contradirectionality (p. 9-86)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-54

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Specific configuration parameters are associated to the following boards:
TRBx boards. Table 9-12, TRBx Transmission Parameters Table (p. 9-55) is
dedicated to TRBx transmission parameters.
LOFAx boards. Table 9-13, LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table (p. 9-57) is
dedicated to
ALCT boards. Table 9-14, ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Parameter Table
(p. 9-58) is dedicated to ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering parameters.
ETHC boards. Table 9-15, ETHC Configuration Mode Parameters Table (p. 9-58) is
dedicated to ETHC configuration mode parameters.

2*GE_FC boards. Table 9-16, 2*GE_FC Signal Type Transportation Parameters
Table (p. 9-59) is dedicated to 2*GE_FC signal type transportation parameters.
TDMX 1180 boards. Table 9-17, TDMX 1180 Port Profile Parameters Table
(p. 9-59) is dedicated to TDMX 1180 port profile parameters.
WMAN 1100 boards. Table 9-18, WMA 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table
(p. 9-59) is dedicated to WMA 1100 provisioning parameters.
WMAN 3x74 boards. Table 9-19, WMA
OSCU boards. Table 9-20, OSCU Channel Supervision Synchronization Parameter
3x74 Provisioning Parameters Table

(p. 9-60) is dedicated to WMA 3x74 provisioning parameters.
Table (p. 9-62) is dedicated to OSCU supervision synchronization parameters.
Depending on TRBx models, some of the following parameters may not apply.
Table 9-12
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
UDC_CONFIG
Configuration of a User Data

Channel.
Not used
A 2.048 kbps link may be plugged

into the User Data Channel faceplate
connection.
The configuration plans

that no link is plugged
into the User Data
Channel faceplate
connection.
Add/drop to front panel
The configuration plans

that a link is plugged into
the User Data Channel
faceplate connection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-55

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-12
(continued)
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
RPO_MODE
Receiver Parameter Optimization

Mode.
Automatic
An optimization mechanism enables

to clearly determine if the optical
signal corresponds to digital value 0
or 1.
The optimization
mechanism is based on
the FEC (Forward Error
Correction).
Factory
The optimization
mechanism is based on
the standard manufacturer
mechanism.
SBS_SUPPR
Suppression of Stimulated Brillouin

Scattering.
A mechanism to compensate for
vibrations inside the fiber.
This parameter does not apply for
TRBD4xxx boards.
Force_LOSS
A mechanism to force a TRBx to

send a LOSS indication to the remote
network element.
When Force_LOSS is Activated, the
receiver interface is disabled
TDCM_Mode
Tunable Dispersion Compensator

Module Mode
Enabled
The suppression
mechanism is enabled.
Disabled
The suppression
mechanism is disabled.
Activated
The mechanism is
activated.
Un-activated
The mechanism is
deactivated.
automatic
Chromatic dispersion
tuning is performed
automatically.
manual
Chromatic dispersion
tuning must be done
manually via
Board>Optical Power
level Configuration
menu.
Signal_TYPE
Indicates the type of client signal.
CBR10G
10 Gigabit SH, Constant

Bit Rate
10GBLAN
10 Gigabit Ethernet LA
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-56

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also

Good to Know
Depending on the value you assigned to Line State at TRBx declaration, you may need to
take an action on TRBx transmission parameters:
If you have set Line State to ...
and you want to ...
ON
disable the optical interface emission and reception, then

you must set:
Force LOSS to Activated,
APSD Control to Laser Forced Off.
Refer to: Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC

Boards Laser (p. 9-111)
enable the optical interface, then you must set Force
LOSS to Un-Activated.
OFF
Table 9-13
LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
COVER_DISABLE
Drives the LOFA shutdown delay

depending on the assigned value.
Cover_Enable
The laser is shutdown

immediately and the
traffic is interrupted.
Cover_Disable
The laser is shutdown

after 5 minutes delay.
This delay lets you

remove the cover
without traffic
interruption.
During these 5
minutes, you can
perform tasks that
require the cover to be
removed.
ATTENTION: If after the 5
minutes delay, the safety

cover is not replaced,
LOFA laser is shutdown.
See Also
Managing LOFA Upgrade with EMPM1000 (p. 9-121)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-57

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-14
ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Parameter Table
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
SBS_SUPPR
Suppression of Stimulated Brillouin

Scattering.
Enabled
A mechanism to compensate for

vibrations inside the fiber.
The suppression
mechanism is enabled.
Disabled
The suppression
mechanism is disabled.
See Also
Configuring ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism (p. 9-90)

Each of these parameters may have a Reference Point value.
A Reference Point is a label for display only, which value informs about the location
where the related parameter applies in the board.
Table 9-15
ETHC Configuration Mode Parameters Table
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
CONF_MODE
Enables the ETHC to work in

concentration or Add & Drop mode.
Concentrator_Auto
Default value
Only L13 optical line is
enabled.
AddDrop_Manual
Enables L13 and L14

optical lines.
ATTENTION: You cannot
change the configuration

mode from
AddDrop_Manual to
Concentrator_Auto.
Concentrator_Manual
ot used in the current

configuration.
See Also
Configuring ETHC Working Mode (p. 9-74)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-58

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-16
2*GE_FC Signal Type Transportation Parameters Table
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Signal_Type
Indicates the type of signal

transported by the Ethernet medium.
1GBE LAN
The selected value applies to both

client lines.
1 Gigabit Ethernet LA
FIBER CHANNEL
Fiber Channel
See Also
Configuring 2xGBE_FC Board Signal Type Transportation (p. 9-77)
Table 9-17
TDMX 1180 Port Profile Parameters Table
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Power Tolerance (dB)
Determines the maximum variation

between actual and target power the
system tolerates without raising a
Performance Degraded (PD) alarm.
Beyond this tolerance, PD alarm is
raised.
1 to +3 dB
The maximum power value which

determines a channel blocking.
-50 to -30 dBm
Blocking Level
Default: 2 dB
See Also
Configuring TDMX 1180 Port Profile (p. 9-91)
Table 9-18
WMAN 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table
Parameters
Description
Background Control
Process
Background control process of the

output power. When enabled, it is one
of the parameters which determines if
the output power is kept.
Correction Process
Attenuation correction process.

When enabled, adjusts the attenuation
when discrepancies exist between
requested and measured attenuation
values.
Board Output
According to the selected value,

determines if the board provides
optical output or not.
Possible Values
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
No optical output
Optical output
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-59

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-18
WMAN 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table
(continued)
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Blocking Threshold
The value which determines when a

channel is blocked.
+30 to +40 dBm, 1 dB

step.
Default: +40 dBm.
Control Period

raised.
1 to +3 dB
Periodicity of background control

process execution.
+30 to +600 sec, 10 sec

step.
Default: 2 dB
Default: 60 sec.
Input Channel Threshold
PGE Commissioning
The minimum power value to

consider that there is a channel at the
input port.
Enables to determine a flat spectrum
at WMA 1100 commissioning
phase.
Attention: Refer to Configuring
-26 to 0 dBm, 1 dB step.

Default: -22 dBm.
Off
The equalization
process is not active.
WMA 1100 Equalization

Parameter (p. 9-94) to understand
how to manage this parameter.
Even
The equalization
process is enabled for
even channels.
Odd
The equalization
process is enabled for
odd channels.
Context of the NE
Qualifies the configuration of the E

where WMA board is plugged.
OADM
REPEATER
See Also
Configuring WMA Provisioning Parameters (p. 9-93)
Configuring WMA 1100 Equalization Parameter (p. 9-94)
Table 9-19
WMAN 3x74 Provisioning Parameters Table
Parameters
Description
Background Control
Process
Background control process of the

output power. When enabled, it is one
of the parameters which determines if
the output power is kept.
Possible Values
Enabled
Disabled
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-60

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-19
WMAN 3x74 Provisioning Parameters Table
(continued)
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Correction Process
Attenuation correction process.
Enabled
Disabled
When enabled, adjusts the attenuation

when discrepancies exist between
requested and measured attenuation
values.
Board Output
According to the selected value,

determines if the board provides
optical output or not.
No optical output

raised.
1 to +3 dB
Periodicity of background control

process execution.
+30 to +600 sec, 10 sec

step.
Control Period(s)
Default: 2 dB
Default: 60 sec.
Blocking Level (dBm)
The maximum power value which

determines a channel blocking.
-30 to -50 dBm, 1 dB

step.
Default: -30 dBm.
Express Port 1
Express Port 2
Express Port 3
According to the selected Express

port, determines if VOA is activated
or not.
No Optical Output
The VOA is at
maximum attenuation.
Optical Output
The VOA is activated.

Control / Correction
Type
The flag which determines:
Context of the NE
if the channel power is kept at the

output of the Wavelength
Selective Switch,
Power
Attenuation
Default: Power.
if the channel attenuation is kept

in the Wavelength Selective
Switch.
Qualifies the configuration of the E

where WMA board is plugged.
OADM
REPEATER
See Also
Configuring WMA Provisioning Parameters (p. 9-93)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-61

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-20
OSCU Channel Supervision Synchronization Parameter Table
Parameters
Description
OSC Clock
Synchronization
OSCU board supports channel

supervision. When several nodes
have OCSU boards, you need to
decide which OSCU board will be the
reference and which OSCU board
will have to synchronize with the
reference one.
Possible Values
Local Clock
This value defines the

reference OSCU
board for
synchronization.
Receive Signal Clock
This value defines the

OSCU board which
synchronizes with the
reference board.
See Also
Declaring OSCU Supervision Boards (p. 9-29)

Table 9-21, TRBx/ALCT Laser Output Power Configuration Parameter Table (p. 9-62)
describes the laser output power level configuration which applies to TRBx or ALCT
boards.
Table 9-21
TRBx/ALCT Laser Output Power Configuration Parameter Table
Parameters
Description
Pre-Emphasis
Assigns the laser output power value

for the selected TRBx or ALCT
channel.
Possible Values
For 10 Gbps
transponders and
concentrators:
-24 to +1 dBm
For 40 Gbps
transponders and
concentrators without
BOFA:
-15 to +1 dBm
For 40 Gbps
transponders and
concentrators with
BOFA:
-15 to +9,5 dBm
For ALCT board:

-14 to +11 dBm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-62

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-21
TRBx/ALCT Laser Output Power Configuration Parameter Table

(continued)
Parameters
Description
Chromatic Dispersion
Enables to tune manually the value of

the chromatic dispersion
compensation module.
Possible Values
For TRBD44xx:
-400 to 400 ps/nm,
10 ps/nm step
For TRBD46xx:
-500 to 500 ps/nm,
10 ps/nm step
See Also
Configuring TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power (p. 9-78)
Table 9-22, WMA 1100 Laser Output Power Configuration Parameters Table
(p. 9-63) describes the laser output power level configuration which applies to
WMA 1100 boards.
Table 9-22
WMAN 1100 Laser Output Power Configuration Parameters Table
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Attenuation - Line
Output
Offset attenuation applied at the

board output.
1.5 to 11.5 dB,

Default: 1.5 dB
The assigned value includes the offset

attenuation defined in the previous
parameter.
Attenuation - Channel
Attenuation applied to the selected

channel.
8.7 to 30.7 dB, 0.1 dB

step
Default: 20.7 dB
See Also
Table 9-23, WMA 3174 Laser Power Configuration Parameters Table (p. 9-63)
describes the laser power level configuration which applies to WMA 3174 boards.
Table 9-23
WMAN 3174 Laser Power Configuration Parameters Table
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Attenuation Wavelength Selective

Switch Input
Offset attenuation applied to any

channel going through the given
Express port.
1 to 11 dB, 0.1 dB step
Optical Power LevelChannel
Power applied to the selected

channel.
-27 to +20 dBm, 0.1 dBm

step
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-63

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also

Table 9-24, TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table (p. 9-64) describes TRBx shutdown criteria.
Table 9-24
TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Incoming Alarms
A group of specific WDM incoming

alarms that can be raised from the
transmission blocks of TRBC/TRBD
boards.
Radio button: On
For each group of alarms corresponds

a set of 3 associated actions.
By default the first group

is selected.
The associated Incoming

Alarms / Action is
selected.
Radio button: Off
The associated Incoming

Alarms / Action is not
selected.
Action
Indicates the resultant consequence

on the signal if one of the incoming
alarm is raised.
AIS
AIS (Alarm Indicator

Signal) is inserted toward
client/user side.
SHUTDOWN
If one of the
corresponding incoming
alarms is raised, the
client/user side laser is
shutdown.
TRANSPARENT
The signal flows without

any change.
See Also
Configuring TRBx Shutdown Criteria (p. 9-83)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-64

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 families of parameters enable to manage a LOFA11xx board:
APT: Amplifier Power Tuning
VOA: Variable Optical Attenuation
APT Parameters
APT parameter family enables to tune the LOFA11xx laser power.

VOA Parameters
VOA parameter family enables to correct the optical signal deviation resulting from the
laser power increase or decrease.
LOFA11xx board tuning is driven by APT and VOA modes.
Table 9-25, APT Modes Table (p. 9-65) describes the different APT modes
Table 9-26, VOA Modes Table (p. 9-66) describes the different VOA modes
Table 9-27, APT/VOA Parameters Table (p. 9-67) describes the APT / VOA
parameters
Table 9-25
APT Modes Table
APT Modes
Description
Manual
1rst stage output power (OP1) and 2nd stage output power (OP2) values are
entered manually.
In the Manual APT mode, other APT parameters are inactivated.
The Manual APT mode:
Power
is possible for all types of LOFA boards.
is compatible with all VOA modes for unidirectional LOFA board.
is compatible with Manual VOA mode only for bidirectional LOFA

board.
The 2 following parameters are configured manually:
2nd stage output power (OP2)
Limitation parameter of non linear effects (OP_Diff)
The configuration of these 2 parameters determines the value of 1rst stage

output power (OP1).
The Power APT mode:
is possible for unidirectional LOFA board only.
is compatible with all VOA modes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-65

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-25
APT Modes Table
(continued)
APT Modes
Description
Gain
The 2 following parameters are configured manually:
IT
The Effective IntersTage attenuation.

This parameter represents the attenuation between the location where
the channels are added and the 2nd stage input.
EOL span
The Effective End Of Life span attenuation.

This parameter represents the attenuation between the upstream node
where the channels are added and the 1rst stage input.
In the Gain APT mode, other parameters are inactivated.
The Gain APT mode:
is possible for all types of LOFA board.
is compatible with Manual VOA mode only.
See Also
Configuring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power (p. 9-79)
Table 9-26
VOA Modes Table
VOA Modes
Description
Manual
Attenuation value (VOA) is entered manually.

In the Manual VOA mode, other VOA parameters are inactivated.
The Manual VOA mode:
MSV
is possible for all types of LOFA board.
is compatible with all APT mod
In the Mid Stage VOA tuning, K_Diff is entered manually:

K_Diff is the difference between the theoretical ideal flatness constant (given
by the manufacturer) and the effective flatness constant.

In the MSV VOA mode, other VOA parameters are inactivated.
The MSV VOA mode:
is possible for unidirectional LOFA board only.
is compatible with Manual and Power APT modes.
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-66

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-27
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
APT tuning mode
Manual
Power
Gain
APT Parameters Area

Mode
OP1
1rst stage Output Power
+1 to +17.5 dBm,0.5 dB
step
Default: +1 dBm
OP2
2nd stage Output Power
+2 to +17 dBm,0.5 dB
step
Default: +8 dBm
OP_Diff
Limitation parameter of non linear

effects
-10.5 to +37 dB,0.25 dB

step
Default: +9 dB
IT
The Effective IntersTage attenuation.
0 to +47 dB,0.25 dB step
This parameter represents the

attenuation between the location
where the channels are added and the
2nd stage input.
Default: 15 dB
VOA Parameters Area

Mode
VOA
K_Diff
VOA tuning mode
Variable Output Attenuation
The difference between the

theoretical ideal flatness constant
(given by the manufacturer) and the
effective flatness constant.
Manual
MSV
+1 to +15 dB,0.5 dB
step
To compensate for
span degradation (line
ageing), it is
recommended to
assign VOA value
greater than 1 dB.
For detailed
information, refer to
1626LM System
Turn-Up Guide
-14 to +14 dB,0.25 dB

step
Default: 0 dB
EOL Span Parameters Area
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-67

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-27
(continued)
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
EOLspan
The Effective End Of Life span

attenuation.
10 to +62.5 dB,0.25 dB
step
This parameter represents the

attenuation between the upstream
node where the channels are added
and the 1rst stage input.
Default: +14 dB
See Also

APSD (Automatic Power ShutDown) is an optical safety mechanism which prevent
powerful light to be emitted in case of fiber brake.
APSD mechanism applies:
to bidirectional amplifiers, or
to 2 unidirectional amplifiers linked by a directionality contract.
When enabled, APSD mechanism is able:

1. to detect a loss of signal at amplifier stage 1 reception,
2. to stop the amplifier stage 2 emitting laser,
3. to restart amplifier laser automatically when the problem is solved.
Table 9-28, APSD Parameters Table (p. 9-68) describes APSD parameters.
Table 9-28
APSD Parameters Table
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Laser Stage
Identifies the amplifier laser stage
Laser Stage 01
Laser Stage 02
Laser Current State
Displays the current state of the

amplifier laser stages.
Off/On
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-68

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-28
APSD Parameters Table
(continued)
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
APSD
Displays the state of the ASPD

mechanism which has been
configured via ASPD configuration
list box of ASPD Configuration
window.
Enabled
ASPD mechanism is
enabled. In case of
problem at signal
reception, the
contradirectional emitting
laser is switched off.
Laser Forced Off
APSD mechanism is
disabled and the laser is
switched off.
APSD Control
Enable the selection of possible

configuration for APSD mechanism.
Enabled
ASPD mechanism is
enabled. In case of
problem at signal
reception, the
contradirectional emitting
laser is switched off.
Laser Forced Off
APSD mechanism is
disabled and the laser is
switched off.
Laser Current State
Displays the laser operational state.
Laser Off/On
See Also
Configuring LOFA11xx APSD (p. 9-85)
TDMX and WMAN Configuration Parameters
For TDMX parameters, refer to TDMX Port Configuration Parameters (p. 9-69)
For WMA parameters, refer to WMA 3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters

(p. 9-70)
TDMX Port Configuration Parameters
TDMX boards have 8 ports.

For each port, you can set:
the channel wavelength to be assigned to the selected port,
the output power level.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-69

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-29, TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table (p. 9-70) describes the port
configuration parameters.
Table 9-29
TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Port Number
Indicates the port number to be

configured.
1 to 8
Channel
Indicates the channel frequency to

drop.
Blocked
The channel
frequency is not
transmitted to the
output of the TDMX
1180 board.
This parameter is for display only.
One of the 96
possible channels
The channel
frequency to be
dropped toward
tributary boards.
Output Power
Indicates the output power to be

assigned to the selected port.
-30 to 0 dBm,1 dB step
ote: To know how to configure TDMX ports, refer to Configuring TDMX 1180
Output Power (p. 9-92).
WMAN3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters
ote: WMA 3x74 parameters can be set for each channel frequency.
However, you can propagate a set of parameter values at once, as follows:
If you want to
propagate a set of
parameter values ...
Then, on the top first line of Channel Configuration

window, you must ...
to some or all frequencies
1. Assign the values for each parameters.

2. Select the frequency to configure.
3. Click Apply.
4. End.
to all non configured

frequencies
1. Assign the values for each parameters.

2. Click Apply.
3. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-70

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-30
WMAN 3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters Table
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Frequency
The frequency of the wavelength handled

by the WMA board.
One of the 96 possible channels

from 191150 GHz
Input
The WMA input port of the channel to be

transmitted to the WMA output port.
The channels are blocked. There

is no transmission to the output
port whatever the input port.
WMA input port can be:
Express: the input port type handling
WDM channels coming from other

E.
IN 1
The channel frequency is

assigned to express input port
number 1.
Add: the input port type handling
WDM channels coming from Tributary

boards.
IN 2

number 2.
IN 3

number 3.
Add1
The channel frequency coming

from Tributary board is assigned
to add & drop input port number
1.
Add2

2.
Add3

3.
Add4

4.
Default value: 0.
Power in dBm
The power value to be applied between

input and output port for transmission
channel optimization.
From -27 to 20 dBm.

Default value: -27 dBm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-71

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 9-30
WMAN 3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters Table
Parameters
Description
Power Maintain
This parameter makes part of a process

which guarantees the channel output power
if:
Power Maintain is Enabled, A D
Background Control Process is

Enabled, A D
Correction Process is Enabled, A D
Control/Correction Type is set to

Power
(continued)
Possible Values
Enabled
Disabled
Default value: Enabled.
ote: To know how to configure WMA 3x74 channels, refer to Configuring

Channels on WMA 3x74 boards (p. 9-95)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-72
Configuring Boards
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring Boards
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes board configuration procedures.

Contents
9-74
9-75
9-77
9-78
9-79
9-80
9-81
9-82
9-83
9-84
9-85
9-86
9-87
9-88
9-90
9-91
9-92
9-93
Configuring WMA 1100 Equalization Parameter
9-94
Configuring Channels on WMA 3x74 boards
9-95
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-73
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure ETHC working mode.

Before you begin
Board View window is displayed.
How to configure ETHC working mode
To configure ETHC working mode, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board>Modify specific equipment configuration

Result: The Specific parameter configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For CONF_MODE parameter, select the relevant value from the following list:
Concentrator_Auto
AddDrop_Manual
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
About ETHC Configurations (p. 9-5)
Table 9-15, ETHC Configuration Mode Parameters Table (p. 9-58)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-74
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure when you want:
to display ETHC cross connections
to create ETHC cross connection in an Add & Drop context.
The VLAN Cross Connection Management Window
The VLAN Cross Connection Management window shows:
vertically: the ports (1 to 9) for both L13 and L14 10 Gbps optical lines. The
User-Client channel numbers (51-59 and/or 100-999, depending on the ETHC

configuration mode) are displayed next to the port number.
horizontally: the User-Client ports (1 to 12, depending on ETHC working mode)
which supports the User-Client channels. The User-Client channel numbers (51-59
and/or 100-999, depending on the ETHC configuration mode) are displayed next to
the port number.
When applicable a graphical link shows the cross connection between a User-Client
channel port and an ETHC line port. Each port number is associated with a channel
number.
Before you begin
ETHC board view is displayed.
To understand the content of this window , refer to The VLA Cross Connection
Management Window (p. 9-75).
How to display ETHC cross connections
To display ETHC cross connections, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board> Manage ETHC Cross Connections....

Result: The VLAN Cross Connection Management window is displayed.
If necessary, refer to The VLA Cross Connection Management Window (p. 9-75)
to understand the content of this window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Cancel to finish.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-75
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How to create ETHC cross connections in an Add & Drop context
To create ETHC cross connections in an Add & Drop context, perform the following
steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, to remind how channel and port numbers are managed, refer to About
ETHC Configurations (p. 9-5).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check that ETHC working mode is set to AddDrop_Manual.

To know how to configure the ETHC working mode, refer to Configuring ETHC
Working Mode (p. 9-74)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board> Manage ETHC Cross Connections....

Result: The VLAN Cross Connection Management window is displayed.
If necessary, refer to The VLA Cross Connection Management Window (p. 9-75)
to understand the content of this window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform one of the following:
To create an Add & Drop cross connection:
1. Enter a channel number (picked from range 100 to 990) associated with a
User-Client port (Horizontal)
2. Enter the same channel number to the selected User-Client port.
3. Keep clicked the selected port number and drag until the target port of either L13
or L14 lines.
To create a path-through cross connection:
1. Enter a channel number associated with one port of either L13 or L14 lines.
2. Enter the same channel number to the selected port.
3. Keep clicked the selected port number and drag until the target port of the lines.
Reminder:
In case of migration from Concentrator mode to Add & Drop mode , you can:
Keep the existing channels numbered from 51 to 59. For any circumstances, if you
want to redesign the way your services are handled, you will need to delete these
existing cross connections and to create new ones.
Implement the new channels by picking the channel numbers from the range: 100 to
999.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, repeat from Step 4 until the end of cross connection process.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-76
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure 2xGBE_FC board signal type transportation.

Before you begin
How to configure 2xGBE_FC board signal type transportation
To configure 2xGBE_FC board signal type transportation, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board>Modify specific equipment configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Signal_Type parameter, select the relevant value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Table 9-16, 2*GE_FC Signal Type Transportation Parameters Table (p. 9-59)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-77
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure TRBx or ALCT laser output power

Before you begin
How to configure TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power
To configure TRBx or ALCT laser output power, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board>Optical Power Level Configuration

Result: The ALC & Output power level configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant pre-emphasis value for the selected channel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Table 9-21, TRBx/ALCT Laser Output Power Configuration Parameter Table (p. 9-62)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-78
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure LOFA laser output power.

Before you begin
How to configure LOFA Laser Output Power
To configure LOFA11xx laser output power, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board > APT/MSV.

Result: The APT/VOA configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each required parameter, select the relevant value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters (p. 9-65)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-79
Configuring Boards
Configuring WMAN Laser Power
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring WMAN Laser Power

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure WMA laser output power.

Before you begin
How to configure WMAN Output Power
To configure WMA laser output power, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board>Optical Power Level Configuration

Result: The ALC & Output power level configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant attenuation parameter value for each selected element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Table 9-22, WMA 1100 Laser Output Power Configuration Parameters Table
(p. 9-63)
Table 9-23, WMA 3174 Laser Power Configuration Parameters Table (p. 9-63)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-80
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure TRBx frequency.

Before you begin
How to configure TRBx Frequency
To configure TRBx frequency, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board > Modify equipment configuration

Result: The Modify Equipment parameter window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the list, click on the frequency corresponding to required wavelength.

Result: The selected frequency is displayed on the left.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-81
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure TRBx transmission parameters.

Before you begin
How to configure TRBx transmission parameters
To configure TRBx transmission parameters, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board > Modify specific equipment configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each required parameter, select the relevant value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Table 9-12, TRBx Transmission Parameters Table (p. 9-55)

Good to Know
take an action on TRBx transmission parameters:
and you want to ...
ON

you must set:
Force LOSS to Activated,
APSD Control to Laser Forced Off.
Refer to: Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC

Boards Laser (p. 9-111)
OFF

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-82
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to set the TRBx shutdown criteria.

Before you begin
User-Client OGPI transmission block is displayed

How to configure TRBx Shutdown Criteria
To configure TRBx shutdown criteria, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Transmission > Shutdown Criteria Configuration.

Result: The Shutdown Criteria Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on the relevant radio button to change.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-83
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to configure the 10 GBE LA data frame GFP-F
encapsulation into G.709 frame for 40 Gps TRBC.
Before you begin
40 Gps TRBC is declared.
XFP module(s) is/are declared.
Cabling is performed.
Transmission update is performed.
Transmission View is displayed.
How to configure 40 Gbps TRBC Ethernet mapping
To configure 10 GBE LA data frame GFP-F encapsulation into G.709 frame for 40 Gps
TRBC, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that prerequisites are fulfilled (Refer to Before you begin (p. 9-84)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click Transmission block port#x-ODU2 (where x = 1,2,3 or 4 depending on the

number of XFP in service) and select Ethernet Mapping.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Depending on the type of GFP-F encapsulation, tick one of the following:
Standard: This option blocks the Start of Frame, Ethernet Preambule and Ordered
Sets.
Proprietary: This option lets the Start of Frame, Ethernet Preambule and Ordered
Sets to be transmitted into the G.709 frame according to ITU-T Serie G, Supplement
43, 7.3
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-84
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure LOFA11xx APSD.

Before you begin
How to configure LOFA APSD
To configure LOFA11xx APSD, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board > APSD Configuration.

Result: The APSD Management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select a LOFA11xx stage and click Configuration....

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The APSD Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the APSD Control list, select the required value and click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
LOFA11xx APSD Parameters (p. 9-68)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-85
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to configure bidirectionality for:
2 unidirectional horizontal LOFA11xx,
2 WMA 1100.
Before you begin
The 2 boards to link are declared.
If applicable, the 2 LOFA11xx boards are unidirectional.
Connectors are in service,
Cabling has been declared and activated,
One board is selected.
Board view window is displayed.
How to configure Bidirectionality
To configure bidirectionality, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board > Modify Equipment Configuration.

Result: The Modify Equipment parameters window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the relevant fields, enter the identification of the contradirectional board:
Rack number,
subrack number,
Slot number.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK to finish.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Declaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards (p. 9-38)
Declaring WMA 1100 Boards (p. 9-47)
Table 9-11, Contradirectionality Parameters table (p. 9-54)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-86
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure the BMDX band associated to a CMDX board.
Before you begin
CMDX Board View window is displayed.
How to configure the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX
To configure the BMDX band associated to a CMDX board, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board > Modify Equipment Configuration...

Result: The Modify Equipment parameters window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Band parameter, select the relevant band number.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Table 9-10, CMDX Band Parameter Table (p. 9-54)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-87
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure ALCT board working mode as static or dynamic.
Good to Know
The ALCT (Automatic Level ConTrol) board hosts the 1626 LM power regulation
function which performs the following:
enables to maintain the booster input at a constant power,
helps to keep low enough the transmitted power per channel for a low channel count
to avoid non-linear effects on working channels,
helps to compensate for the power variations when some channels are missing.
As a consequence, the ALCT board configuration has a major impact on the booster input
power.
ALCT Working Modes
The ALCT board works according to the two following modes:
Static (or Disable) Mode
In this mode the ALCT board output power is manually set at a constant value. The
booster input power varies depending on this fixed value and the number of channels.
To manage the ALCT board output power, refer to Configuring TRBx or ALCT
Laser Output Power (p. 9-78).
Dynamic Mode
In this mode, a set point value is defined as the booster input power (Power
Configuration section). In this mode the ALCT board will adapt dynamically its
output power to maintain the booster input power at this set point value whatever the
number of active channels is.
If all or most of the channels are present, the role of ALCT in booster input power
will be insignificant.
If some channels disappear, ALCT output power will rapidly increase to

compensate for the resultant power loss.
Before you begin
Rx LOFA of relevant node is selected.
Related OTS transmission view is displayed.
Port#1-OMS is selected.
How to configure ALCT working mode
To configure ALCT working mode, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click and select ALC Management.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-88
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Automatic Laser Control Management window is displayed

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform one or more of the following:

To specify the related ALCT board location:
1. From Dynamic ALC Configuration section, enter related ALCT board rack, subrack
and slot numbers.
2. Click Set.
3. End.
To set the configuration mode:
1. From Mode Configuration section, click the relevant radio button. For mode details
refer to ALCT Working Modes (p. 9-88).
2. End.
To set the booster input power set point value:
1. In the Power Configuration section, enter a value.

The value displayed into the grayed part of Booster input is the last value set.
2. Click Set.
The new set point value is taken into account.
3. End.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-89
Configuring Boards
Configuring ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mechanism

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism.

Before you begin
ALCT Board View window is displayed.
How to configure ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism
To configure ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism, perform the following

steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For SBS_SUPPR parameter, select the relevant value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Table 9-14, ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Parameter Table (p. 9-58)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-90
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure TDMX 1180 port profile.

Before you begin
TDMX 1180 Board View window is displayed.
How to configure TDMX 1180 port profile
To configure TDMX 1180 port profile, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For ACC_WDM and BLCK_LVL parameters, select the relevant value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Table 9-17, TDMX 1180 Port Profile Parameters Table (p. 9-59),
Table 9-29, TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table (p. 9-70).
Configuring TDMX 1180 Output Power (p. 9-92),
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-91
Configuring Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure TDMX 1180 Output Power.

Before you begin
TDMX Board View window is displayed.
How to configure TDMX 1180 Output Power
To configure TDMX 1180 output power, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board> Configure TDMX 1180...

Result:
The TDMX Port Configuration window is displayed.
The port number and related channel frequency are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For any port number/channel frequency, select the required output value as described in
Table 9-29, TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table (p. 9-70).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Set Selected Port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply to finish.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Table 9-29, TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table (p. 9-70),

Board Specific Configuration Parameters (p. 9-55).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-92
Configuring Boards
Configuring WMAN Provisioning Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring WMAN Provisioning Parameters

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure WMA provisioning parameters.

Before you begin
WMAN Board View window is displayed.
How to configure WMAN provisioning parameters
To configure WMA provisioning parameters, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For all the parameter displayed in the list, select the relevant value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Table 9-18, WMA 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table (p. 9-59)
Table 9-19, WMA 3x74 Provisioning Parameters Table (p. 9-60)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-93
Configuring Boards
Configuring WMAN 1100 Equalization Parameter
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring WMAN 1100 Equalization Parameter

Purpose
Use this procedure to equalize all the channels going through WMA 1100 board.
Before you begin
WMA 1100 equalization parameter must be done at commissioning phase only.
Channel must be blocked.
WMAN 1100 Board View window is displayed.
How to configure WMAN 1100 equalization parameter
To configure WMA 1100 equalization parameter, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For PGE Commissioning parameter displayed in the list, perform the following steps:
1. Select Odd or Even and click OK.
Result:
The equalization process starts for the channels of the selected parity.
The window is open until the end of equalization process.
At the end of the process, the value is reset to Off.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Continue the channel equalization process of the same parity on other nodes of your
network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once you have performed the channel equalization process of a given parity on all nodes
of your network, repeat the process for the other channel parity node by node.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once all channel equalization of all nodes have been performed, reset PGE
Commissioning to Off on each relevant node.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Table 9-18, WMA 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table (p. 9-59)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-94
Configuring Boards
Configuring Channels on WMAN 3x74 boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring Channels on WMAN 3x74 boards

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure channels on WMA 3174 boards.

Before you begin
WMAN 3174 Board View window is displayed.
How to configure channels on WMAN 3174 boards
To configure channels on WMA 3174 boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board >Configure WMAN 3x74....

Result: The Channel Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For all the parameter displayed in the list, select the relevant value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
WMA 3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters (p. 9-70)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-95

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to set boards in service or
out of service.
Contents
9-97
9-98
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-96

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to set a board in service.

Before you begin
ote: This procedure does not apply to SFP/XFP modules. To know how to set a
SFP/XFP module in/out of service, refer to:
Setting a SFP/XFP Module Out of Service (p. 9-103)
The board operational status is Out of Service ( o red padlock).
How to set a board in service
To set a board in service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Equipment > Set in Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The board operational status becomes In Service (Red padlock is displayed).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Good to Know
For 40 Gbps transponders, you can set the WDM line connector in service only if:
1. WDM Module output connector is in service.
2. VOA input connector is in service.
3. Cabling between WDM Module output connector and VOA input or BOFA input is
declared.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-97

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to set a board out of service.

Before you begin
ote: This procedure does not apply to SFP/XFP modules. To know how to set a
SFP/XFP module in/out of service, refer to:
Setting a SFP/XFP Module Out of Service (p. 9-103)
The board operational status is In Service (Red padlock is displayed).
How to set a board out of service
To set a board out of service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Equipment > Set out of Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result:
EN
The board operational status becomes Out of Service ( o red padlock).
Related alarms are inhibited and will no longer be raised.
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-98

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to manage SFP/XFP
modules.
Contents
9-100
9-101
9-102
9-103
9-104
9-105
9-106
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-99

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SFP means Small Form Factor Pluggable.
XFP means eXtended Form Factor Pluggable.
SFP/XFP modules are hot-swappable optical transceivers which plug in the following
boards:
For ...
You can plug ...
And possible slot#

are ...
ETHC boards
until 9 SFP modules to connect client lines
1 to 9
1 XFP module to connect WDM line ( ot

Mandatory)
13 or 14
2*GE_FC
boards
until 2 SFP modules to connect client lines
1 to 9
1 SFP module to connect WDM line (Mandatory)
13 or 14
TRBD1191
boards
1 XFP to connect client lines (Mandatory)
TRBC boards
10 Gbps: until 4 SFP modules to connect client

lines
40 Gbps: until 4 XFP modules to connect client

lines
1 to 4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-100

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to declare SFP/XFP modules

Before you begin
How to declare a SFP/XFP Module
To declare a SFP/XFP module, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on an empty slot dedicated to SFP/XFP modules.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

Result: The module appears in the board view with operational state In Service (Red
padlock is displayed).
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-101

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to set SFP/XFP module in service.

Before you begin
The module operational status is Out of Service ( o red padlock).
How to set a SFP/XFP module in service
To set a SFP/XFP module in service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Equipment > Set in Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The module operational status becomes In Service (Red padlock is
displayed).
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-102

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to set a SFP/XFP module out of service.

Before you begin
The module operational status is In Service (Red padlock is displayed).
The module has no configured cabling.
All connectors are out of service.
How to set a SFP/XFP module out of service
To set a SFP/XFP module out of service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Equipment > Set out of Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The module operational status becomes Out of Service ( o red padlock).
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-103

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to undeclare SFP/XFP modules.

Before you begin
Module operational status must be set to Out of Service ( o red padlock displayed).
For modules on concentrators, perform the following:

1. Remove loopbacks, then
2. Delete cable configuration.
Attention: Do not unplug a board during a firmware download (Hardware failure
LED in yellow). Otherwise the board will not restart and you will have to return it for
manufacturer repair.
How to undeclare/remove SFP/XFP
To undeclare/remove SFP/XFP modules, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The board disappears from the subrack view.
An UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present) is raised if the board is still plugged into
the slot
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-104

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display SFP/XFP module payload.

Before you begin
Module View window is displayed.
How to display SFP/XFP Module Payload
To display SFP/XFP module payload, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board > Payload Configuration.

Result: The Payload Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-105

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure when you need to change the current SFP or XFP module of a board.
Before you begin
Board View is displayed.
How to change the current SFP or XFP module of a board
To change the current SFP or XFP module of a board, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Equipment> Modify...

Result: The Create/Modify Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the list, select the XFP_Generic or SFP_Generic entry.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform the following sequence:

1. Disconnect the fibers.
2. Unplug the current module.
3. Plug the new module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Equipment> Modify...

Result: The Create/Modify Equipment window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the list, select the new module type entry.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-106
Activating Firmware
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Activating Firmware
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the displayed information and the procedure related to firmware
management.
Contents
9-107
Activating Firmware
9-108

Table 9-31, Firmware Activation Displayed Information (p. 9-107) describes firmware
activation displayed information.
Table 9-31
Information
Description
Board Type
Displays the board acronym.
Location
Displays the board location in the subrack with the following sequence:
rack#
subrack#
slot#
Firmware
Version
Displays the firmware version
Firmware
Status
Displays the firmware status, which can take the following values:
In Service: firmware is up to date and correctly loaded.
Not Accessible: firmware download is not successfully completed. The
board is unstable. This state may require a manual reset.
Downloading: firmware download is in progress.
Misaligned: mismatch between the last downloaded version and the
current version. This state may require an activation.
See Also
Activating Firmware (p. 9-108)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-107
Activating Firmware
Activating Firmware
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Activating Firmware
Purpose
Use this procedure to activate board firmware.

Before you begin
Board firmware status is Misaligned.
How to activate board firmware
To activate board firmware, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration > Firmware activation...

Result: The Firmware activation window is displayed, displaying firmware
information for each board supporting a firmware.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To activate all misaligned boards, perform the following steps:

1. Tick Activate all check box.
2. Click Activate.
3. Go to End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To activate a selection of misaligned boards, perform the following steps:

1. Select one or several misaligned boards.
2. Click Activate.
3. Go to End.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-108

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the parameters and procedures to perform to manage TRBx, ETHC
and 2*GE_FC boards laser.
Contents
9-109
9-111

Good to Know
Port#1-OGPI refers to Client / User side.
Port#101-OGPI refers to WDM line side.
Table 9-32, Laser Control Parameters Table (p. 9-109) describes the parameters you can
manage or display to take control of TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC boards laser.
Table 9-32
Laser Control Parameters Table
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
APSD Control
Enables:
Disable
to force the laser to shutdown,
to let the system to control the

laser.
The laser is not under operator

control. The system controls the
laser shutdown.
Laser Forced Off
You force the laser to shutdown.

Laser Current
State
Displays the laser operational state.
Laser Off/On
See Also
Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser (p. 9-111)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-109

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Good to Know
take an action on TRBx laser:
and you want to ...
ON

you must set:
OFF
APSD Control to Laser Forced Off,
Force LOSS to Activated.

Refer to: Configuring TRBx Transmission
Parameters (p. 9-82)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-110

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to control TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC boards laser.
Before you begin
The transmission view of the related boards is displayed.
OGPI ports are available.

Port#1-OGPIrefers to Client/User side.
Port#101-OGPIrefers to WDM line side.
How to control TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC boards laser
To control TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC boards laser, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the OGPI port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right click and select APSD Configuration...

Result: The APSD Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To force the laser to shutdown, perform the following:

1. From APSD Control list box select Laser Forced Off.
2. Click OK.
3. Go to End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To let the system to control the laser, perform the following steps:
1. From APSD Control list box select Disable.
2. Click OK.
3. Go to End.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Laser Control Parameters (p. 9-109)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-111

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Good to Know
take an action on TRBx laser:
and you want to ...
ON
disable the optical interface emission and reception,

then you must set:
APSD Control to Laser Forced Off,
Force LOSS to Activated.

Parameters (p. 9-82)
OFF

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-112

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the parameters and procedures to perform when you want to manage
external points.
Contents
9-113
9-115
9-116
9-117
9-118
9-119
9-120

External points are devices outside of the 1626 LM which connect to the 1626 LM via
HSKU boards.
Each HSKU board can connect up to:
9 external input points, and
9 external output points.
External input points
External input points trigger housekeeping alarm, based on specific circumstances.

For example:
door open,
intrusion or fire detection,
temperature limit reach,
hygrometry limit reach.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-113

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
External output points
External output points are triggered by the 1626 LM.

For example:
Flashing light,
Fire alarm klaxon.
The link [External Point - 1626 LM] can be assimilated to a circuit which status can be
open or closed.
A circuit logic can determine the external point activation or inactivation, depending on
the circuit status.
The following table gives the rules of external points activation.
If ...
Then ...
External input logic is active

closed
The housekeeping alarm is raised.
External output point status is

active closed
The external device is triggered.
A flag is displayed in the External Points View window.

A flag is displayed in the External Points View window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-114

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

External input and output points have their own parameters:
Table 9-33, External Input Point Parameters Table (p. 9-115) describes External
input point parameters
Table 9-34, External Output Point Parameters (p. 9-115) describes External output
point parameters.
Table 9-33
External Input Point Parameters Table
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Board
HSKU board location in charge of

external point interface
External point type
HSKU board number
External point number
External Point identification
User Label
Alphanumeric character string.

Operator configurable.
Logic
External Point
Circuit logic which determine

external point activation
Active closed
Active open
Circuit status
Closed
ot operator configurable.
Probable Cause
Table 9-34
The type of alarm which will be

raised if the circuit logic and the
circuit status match.
Housekeeping alarm
External Output Point Parameters
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Board
HSKU board location in charge of

external point interface
External point type
HSKU board number
External point number
User Label
External Point identification
Alphanumeric character string.

Operator configurable.
Logic
External Point
Mode
Circuit logic which determine

external point activation
Circuit status
The type of configuration mode.
Active closed
Active open
Open
Closed
Manual
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-115

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display all external points.

Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is started, or
The input points are displayed, or
The output points are displayed.
How to display all external points
To display all external points, perform one of the following actions, depending on the
display:
From the 1626 LM menu bar:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Views>External Points.

Result: The External Points View window is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
From the input or output points list display:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click and select Show All External Points.

Result: The External Points View window is displayed.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-116

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to manage external input points.

Before you begin
External Points View window is displayed, or
Input points only are displayed
How to manage External Input Points
To manage external input points, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select an external input point.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click and select Configuration...

Result: The External Input Point Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
According to your needs, complete the User Label or select the relevant Logic.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-117

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to manage external output points.

Before you begin
External Points View window is displayed, or
Output points only are displayed
How to manage External Input Points
To manage external output points, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select an external output point.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click and select Configuration...

Result: The External Output Point Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
According to your needs, complete the User Label or select the relevant External Point
status.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-118

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to filter external input points.

Before you begin
External Points View window is displayed.
Input and output points are displayed, or
Output points are displayed only.
How to filter External Input Points
To filter external input points, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the External Points View window, right-click and select Show External Input
Points.
Result: The input points are displayed.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-119

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to filter external output points.

Before you begin
External Points View window is displayed.
Input and output points are displayed, or
Input points are displayed only.
How to filter External Output Points
To filter external output points, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the External Points View window, right-click and select Show External Output
Points.
Result: The output points are displayed.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-120

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes the procedures to follow when you need to instal and cable an
EMPM1000 for upgrading LOFA up to 23 dBm.
For any specific power value tuning, refer to 1626 LM System Turn-up Guide - 3AL
75138 GAAA.
Contents
Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM without
OMSP
9-122
Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM with

OMSP
9-124
9-126
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-121

Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-OADM without OMSP

B-OADM without OMSP
Purpose
Use this procedure when you need to instal and cable an EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal
or a B-OADM without OMSP.
Before you begin
You must have the cabling plan of your configuration.
If EMPM1000 is implemented for a preamplifier, collect remote inventory of BMDX

boards.
How to upgrade a LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM without OMSP
To upgrade a LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM without OMSP,

perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Plug EMPM1000 into the slot immediately adjacent to the LOFA to upgrade.
If:
LOFA is in slot n, n as an odd number, you must plug the EMPM1000 into slot n+1.
LOFA is in slot n, n as an even number, you must plug the EMPM1000 into slot n-1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Assign LOFA COVER_DISABLE specific parameter to Cover_Disable.

Result: You can remove the LOFA safety cover without traffic interruption.
ATTENTION: You have 5 minutes maximum to perform the required
connections. When these 5 minutes have passed, LOFA will shut down.
Refer to Table 9-13, LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table (p. 9-57)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the LOFA safety cover.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect fiber reference 1AB-36108-0002 from EMPM output port to LOFA EMPM input
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replace the LOFA safety cover.

Result: The system detects that the safety cover has been replaced and turns the
COVER_DISABLE specific parameter to Cover_Enable.
ATTENTION: Do not remove the cover once it has been replaced. Otherwise,
you take the risk to shut the LOFA down.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-122

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-OADM without OMSP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform EMPM1000 feedback cabling as follows:

If LOFA is...
Then...
A booster
Connect EMPM Mon input port to 1rst stage

Mon input port of related contradirectional
LOFA.
A preamplifier
Refer to BMDX remote inventory information.

If BMDX reference is:
3AL-95504-Ax-AA01, then connect

EMPM Mon input port to Demux output
port of the band dedicated to ALCT board.
3AL-95504-Bx-AA01, then there is no

optical cabling to perform. EMPM
feedback is performed via backpanel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set ports in service for all involved boards.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform logical cabling in compliance with physical cabling.

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-123

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-OADM with OMSP

B-OADM with OMSP
Purpose
Use this procedure when you need to instal and cable an EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal
or a B-OADM with OMSP.
Before you begin
Remind that only 3 EMPM1000 boards fit into a B-OADM shelf which supports
OMSP.
How to upgrade a LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM with OMSP
To upgrade a LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM with OMSP,

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-124

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-OADM with OMSP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If LOFA is...
Then...
A booster

LOFA.
A preamplifier
Connect EMPM Mon input port to OCPU Mon

input port of the corresponding OTS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-125

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure when you need to instal and cable an EMPM1000 in a in a
T/R-OADM.
Before you begin

How to upgrade a LOFA with EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM
To upgrade a LOFA with EMPM1000 in a in a T/R-OADM, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-126

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If LOFA is...
Then...
A booster

LOFA.
A preamplifier
Depending on the configuration:
In case of TR-OADM: connect EMPM Mon

input port to TDMX Mon input port.
In case of R-OADM with BMDX reference

3AL-95504-Ax-AA01: connect EMPM
Mon input port to Demux output port of
the band dedicated to ALCT board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
9-127
10
10
R-OADM
and TR-OADM
Configuration
Management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the parameters and the associated procedures for configuring the
different types of R-OADM and TR-OADM nodes.
Contents
10-2
R-OADM and TR-OADM Main characteristics
10-3
10-5
R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Tasks
10-7
R/TR-OADM etwork Procedures/WMA 3x74 Based
10-9
10-10
10-13
R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMA 3x74 Based
10-16
10-17
10-19
10-20
10-23
R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMA 1100 Based
10-26
10-27
10-28
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-1

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes the main characteristics and the boards involved in:
Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer (R-OADM), or
Tunable and Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer (TR-OADM).
Contents
10-3
10-5
10-7
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following table describes the main characteristics of a Reconfigurable or a Tunable

and Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer.
Table 10-1
Benefits
Remotely reconfigurable
Minimizes on-site intervention.
Makes network planning more flexible in the

sense that channels can be dynamically added,
dropped or passed through according customer
needs.
Saves initial customer investments in

transponders.
Enables migration from fixed OADM to

Reconfigurable OADM at a reasonable cost.
Fixed wavelength transponder architecture (R-OADM

only)
Transponder tunability architecture (TR-OADM only)
Enables transponders to be remotely set at any

available wavelength.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 10-1
(continued)
Benefits
Connectivity
The connectivity degree of R-OADM or a TR-OADM

depends on the number of nodes that one of these
configurations connect to.
For example:
if a R-OADM or TR-OADM node connects to 2

nodes, the node will be degree 2.
if a R-OADM or TR-OADM node connects to 3

or 4 nodes, the node will be degree 3 or degree 4.
The current release enables
R-OADM degree 2 connectivity with

WMA 1100 boards.
R-OADM degree 2 to 8 connectivity with

WMA 3x74 boards.
TR-OADM degree 2 to 8 connectivity.
TR-OADM with multidirectional Add & Drop

A multidirectional Add & Drop configuration
enables to connect the frequency of a given
transponder to any available direction.
Current release handles multidirectional Add &
Drop configurations as follows:
2 directions + 2 Add & Drop blocks.
8 directions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-4

Boards Involved in R-OADM and TR-OADM Nodes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Significant Boards in R-OADM and TR-OADM Nodes
The following table lists the most significant boards involved in R-OADM and
TR-OADM nodes.
Table 10-2
Boards
Function
Applicable Configuration
OADC1102
Splits or combines signals for

Express and Add & Drop channels.
R-OADM with WMA 1100.

board
WMA 1100
Controls channel output.
R-OADM
The WMA 1100:
lets a channel to pass through

with an eventual attenuation,
or
blocks a channel with a

maximum attenuation for Add
& Drop purpose.
BMDX/CMDX/OMDX
Fix MUX/DEMUX
R-OADM
OADC1300
Splits or combines signals for

Express and Add & Drop channels.
TR-OADM
OADC1750
Combines signals for dropped

channels.
TR-OADM
OC C12x0:
Splits signals for Express and Drop

channels.
TR-OADM
1220 for degree 2 connectivity

that may be upgraded until
degree 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 10-2
(continued)
Boards
Function
Applicable Configuration
WMA 3174 (50 GHz)
Associated with TDMX1180 for

transponder tunability, the
WMA 3174 controls channel
output:
TR-OADM
from any input port, lets a

channel to pass through with
an eventual attenuation, or

Without TDMX1180, the

WMA 3174 controls channel
output:
WMA 3374 (100 GHz)
TDMX1180


Controls channel output:


Controls frequencies and power of

dropped channels.
R-OADM
R-OADM
TR-OADM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What you must absolutely know
For the current release, you are recommended:
To know the cabling plan between transponder boards and associated WMA ports,
To know the cabling plan between TDMX and associated transponder boards (for
TR-OADM configurations).
To have the traffic matrix document to know what the network context is.
To have the etwork Description Table ( DT) to know what parameter values must
be assigned for each board of each node.
What are the tasks to perform
R-OADM and TR-OADM configuration can be considered according to two

perspectives:
From network perspective
From node perspective
Configuration from network perspective
In this case you are requested to perform procedures which include actions on all nodes
involved in a transmission path. Configuring R or TR-OADM from a network perspective
comes to:
Create a transmission path.

To know how to create a transmission path, refer to Creating a Transmission Path
(p. 10-10)
Delete a transmission path.

To know how to delete a transmission path, refer to Deleting a Transmission Path
(p. 10-13)
Configuration from node perspective
In this case, you are requested to perform unitary procedures without any concern about
the global network context. Performing unitary procedures comes to:
Create or delete specific cross connections between:
splitter input and output points, for Express channels,
splitter input points and TDMX or CMDX output points, for Add & Drop
channels.
TDMX boards are used in TR-OADM context for transponder tunability purposes.
CMDX boards are used in R-OADM context.
Block a channel connection,
Set an Add & Drop connection for a given channel,
Set an Express connection for a given channel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-7

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R and TR-OADM configuration depends on the type of WMA boards which are
implemented into your nodes.
If your R-OADM configuration is WMA 1100 based, refer to R-OADM Unitary

Procedures / WMA 1100 Based (p. 10-26)
If your R or TR-OADM configuration is WMA 3x74 based, refer to R/TR-OADM

Unitary Procedures/WMA 3x74 Based (p. 10-16)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-8
R/TR-OADM Network Procedures/WMAN3x74 Based

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
In an R or TR-OADM context, you can be led to manage and configure more than a
specific node. You are led to manage a transmission path also called an OCH Trail. From
one end to the other, the transmission path may involve various nodes across your
network.
This section describes the necessary procedures to manage a transmission path in an R or
TR-OADM with WMA 3x74 boards.
Contents
10-10
10-13
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
This topic describes all the required actions that you need to perform if you want to create
a transmission path within your network.
Before you begin
You are recommended to have the traffic matrix document to know what the network
context is.
You are recommended to have the etwork Description Table ( DT) to know what
parameter values must be assigned for each board of each node.
This procedure applies only if WMA 3x74 boards are used.
Check that transponders are emitting.
Good to Know
An OCH Trail represents the path taken by a channel between two termination
points.
An OCH Group represents a group of channels using the same path between 2
termination points.
How to create a transmission path
To create a transmission path, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create an Add & Drop connection for each termination points of the transmission path.
To know how to create an Add & Drop connection for WMA 110 based
configurations, refer to Configuring R-OADM with WMA 1100 Boards (p. 10-28)
To know how to create an Add & Drop connection for WMA 3x74 configurations,
refer to Setting an Add & Drop Connection (p. 10-20)
Result:
If TR-OADM: on the relevant TDMX board, the channel frequency to drop is

assigned to the relevant port number.
On the WDM side:
the relevant transponder receiver is set to Force Loss: Off.
the relevant transponder laser is switched on.
On the relevant WMA boards, the required channel is assigned to the relevant
Add & Drop input port number which connects the related transponder board.
Channel output power of relevant WMA boards is set to minimum (27 dBm /
Blocked).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-10

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If requested, for each intermediate entity crossed by the transmission path, create an
Express connection for the channel.
To know how to create an Express connection for WMA 1100 based configurations,
refer to Configuring R-OADM with WMA 1100 Boards (p. 10-28)
To know how to create an Express connection, refer to Setting an Express

Connection (p. 10-23)
Result: On the relevant WMA
boards, the required channel frequency is assigned to

the relevant Express input port number.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tune the transmission path.

You can tune the transmission path automatically or manually. According to your
operation context, refer to one of the following:
How to tune the transmission path automatically (p. 10-11)
How to tune the transmission path manually (p. 10-12)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
How to tune the transmission path automatically
ote: Automatic transmission path tuning needs SPLM (Smart Photonic Layer
Manager) tool. To know how to use SPLM, refer to 1626LM SPLM User
Provisioning Guide.
To tune the transmission path automatically via SPLM, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Launch SPLM Graphical User Interface.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Synchronize SPLM with the subnetwork.

ote: Any action on Rx and Tx Tributary connections at physical or configuration
level, requires SPLM synchronization.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check that the ALC initial target reference power has been assigned once.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant OCH Group.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Run the APE process.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-11

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How to tune the transmission path manually
ote: For all the following steps, you must follow the signal direction from Tx to Rx.
To tune the transmission path manually (without SPLM), perform the following steps for
all the entities crossed by the OCH Trail:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set all involved amplifiers to GAI mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the ALC initial target reference power for all involved ALCT boards.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set channel power of involved WMA 3x and TDMX boards.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Update the ALC power resulting from the new configuration for all involved ALCT
boards.
For detailed information, refer to 1626 LM System Turn-up Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set all involved amplifiers back to Power-MSV mode.

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-12

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
This topic describes all the required actions that you need to perform if you want to delete
a transmission path from your network.
To delete a transmission path you need to perform the following:
1. Tune the transmission path for deletion.
To know how to tune the transmission path for deletion automatically, refer to
How to tune the transmission path for deletion automatically (p. 10-14)
To know how to tune the transmission path for deletion manually, refer to How
to tune the transmission path for deletion manually (p. 10-14)
2. Block the relevant channel frequency.

3. End.
Before you begin
You are recommended to have the traffic matrix document to know what the network
context is.
You are recommended to have the etwork Description Table ( DT) to know what
parameter values must be assigned for each board of each node.
Good to Know
An OCH Trail represents the path taken by a channel between two termination
points.
An OCH Group represents a group of channels using the same path between 2
termination points.
How to delete a transmission path
To delete a transmission path, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tune the transmission path for deletion.

You can tune the transmission path automatically or manually. According to your
operation context, refer to one of the following:
How to tune the transmission path for deletion automatically (p. 10-14)
How to tune the transmission path for deletion manually (p. 10-14)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-13

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Block the relevant channel frequency.
For WMA 1100 configurations, set the relevant frequency to state: 0 (BLOCKED).
To know how to block a channel frequency, refer to Configuring R-OADM with
WMA 1100 Boards (p. 10-28)
For WMA 3174 configurations:

For all entities crossed by the transmission path, delete existing cross connections.
To know how to display cross connections for a board, refer to Displaying Cross
Connections for a Board (p. 12-9).
R or TR-OADM cross connections involve the following transmission blocks:
OMSOch-OMSoch for Express connections
OMSoch-OGPIoch for Add & Drop connections

Input value 0 (BLOCKED).
boards, the relevant channel frequency is assigned to
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
How to tune the transmission path for deletion automatically
ote: The automatic transmission path tuning needs SPLM (Smart Photonic Layer
Manager) tool. To know how to use SPLM, refer to 1626 LM/SPLM User
Provisioning Guide - 3AL 75138 BAAA.
To tune the transmission path automatically via SPLM, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Launch SPLM Graphical User Interface.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Synchronize SPLM with the subnetwork.

ote: Any action on Rx and Tx Tributary connections at physical or configuration
level, requires SPLM synchronization.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant OCH Group.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Run the APE process with Delete Channels option activated.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
How to tune the transmission path for deletion manually
ote: For all the following steps, you must follow the signal direction from Rx to Tx.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-14

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To tune the transmission path manually (without SPLM), perform the following steps for
all the entities crossed by the OCH Trail:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set all involved amplifiers to GAI mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the ALC initial target reference power for all involved ALCT boards.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set channel power of involved WMA 3x to minimum (-27 dBm).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Update the ALC power resulting from the new configuration for all involved ALCT
boards.
For detailed information, refer to 1626 LM System Turn-up Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set all involved amplifiers back to Power-MSV mode.

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-15
R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 Based

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes the R and TR-OADM management procedures when you are
required to focus on a specific node, rather than on a network perspective. In this context,
your node configuration is based on WMA 3x74 boards.
Contents
10-17
10-19
10-20
10-23
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-16

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to create cross connections for Express or Add & Drop
channel connections for R-OADM or TR-OADM nodes with WMA 3x74 boards.
ote: To know how to delete a cross connection, refer toDeleting Cross
Connections (p. 12-12)
Before you begin
Remind that this procedure applies only if WMA 3x74 boards are used.
You must have the complete cabling plan of your configuration.
How to perform R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections
To perform R-OADM and TR-OADM cross connections, perform the following steps:
If you want to set ...
Then, perform the following cross connections ...
an Express connection
1. From the cross connection management window, click

Create.
2. Select the input TP.
The input TP consists in the channel frequency of the splitter
board input related to one direction/OTS, identified by the
following
format<rack/subrack/slot>,port#1,<channel
frequency>,OMSoch
3. From available output TP list, select the relevant output TP.

The output TP consists in the channel frequency of the splitter
board input related to the other direction/OTS, identified by
the following format
<rack/subrack/slot>,port#1,<same channel
frequency>,OMSoch.
4. To configure the Express path, refer to Setting an Express

Connection (p. 10-23).
5. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-17

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you want to set ...
Then, perform the following cross connections ...
an Add & Drop

connection
1. From the cross connection management window, click

Create.
2. Select the input TP.
The input TP consists in the channel frequency of the splitter
board input, identified by the following
formatport#1,<channel frequency>,OMSoch
3. From available output TP list, select the relevant output TP.
The output TP consists in:
For TR-OADM: the TDMX board which connects the
relevant TRBD board, identified by the following format
<rack/subrack/slot>,<any available port
from 1 to 8>,OGPIoch
For R-OADM: the CMDX board which connects the

relevant TRBD board, identified by the following format
<rack/subrack/slot>,<port#101 to 108>,
OGPIoch
4. To configure an Add & Drop path, refer toSetting an Add &

Drop Connection (p. 10-20).
5. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-18

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure, when you want to block a channel connection.

Before you begin
The channel connection state must be either:
Add & Drop, or
Express.
How to block a channel connection
To block a channel connection perform the following step:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete the relevant cross connection.

To know how to delete a cross connection, refer to Deleting Cross Connections
(p. 12-12).
Result:
EN
If the channel connection initial state is Add & Drop:
On the relevant WMA boards, Input value 0 (BLOCKED) is assigned to the

relevant channel frequency.
On WDM side, the relevant transponder laser is switched off.
On the WDM side, the relevant transponder receiver is set to Force Loss: On.
In case of TR-OADM configuration, the relevant TDMX board is blocked.
If the channel connection initial state is Express:
On the relevant WMA boards, Input value 0 (BLOCKED) is assigned to the

relevant channel frequency.
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-19

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure, when you want to set an Add & Drop connection for a given channel
frequency.
Before you begin
When you want to set an Add & Drop connection, the channel connection state can be
either:
Blocked (Refer to Channel Connection Initial State is Blocked (p. 10-20)), or
Express (Refer to Channel Connection Initial State is Express (p. 10-21)), or
Add & Drop (Refer to Channel Connection Initial State is Add & Drop (For
TR-OADM only) (p. 10-22).
Channel Connection Initial State is Blocked
To set an Add & Drop connection when initial channel connection state is Blocked,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create the cross connection for the Add & Drop connection.
To know how to create a cross connection, refer to How to perform R-OADM and
TR-OADM Cross Connections (p. 10-17).
Result:

On the WDM side:
On the relevant WMA boards, the required channel frequency is assigned to the
relevant Add & Drop input port number which connects the related transponder
board.
Channel output power of relevant WMA boards is set to minimum (-27 dBm /
Blocked).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-20

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel Connection Initial State is Express
To set an Add & Drop connection when channel connection initial state is Express,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete the exiting cross connection dedicated to the Express connection.

(p. 12-12).
Inputvalue 0 (BLOCKED).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create the cross connection for the new Add & Drop connection.
Result:

On the WDM side:
board.
Blocked).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-21

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel Connection Initial State is Add & Drop (For TR-OADM only)
To set an Add & Drop connection when channel connection initial state is Add & Drop.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete the cross connection dedicated to the exiting Add & Drop connection.
(p. 12-12).
Result:
On the relevant WMA boards, the relevant channel frequency is assigned to

Inputvalue 0 (BLOCKED).
On relevant TDMX board, the relevant channel frequency is blocked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create the cross connection for the new Add & Drop connection.
Result:
EN

On the WDM side:
board.
Blocked).
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-22

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure, when you want to set an Express connection for a given channel
frequency.
Before you begin
The channel connection initial state must be either:
Blocked, or
Add & Drop, or
Express (TR-OADM only).
Find the right procedure quickly
According to the channel connection initial case, refer to one of the following:
Channel Connection Initial State is Blocked (p. 10-23)
Channel Connection Initial State is Add & Drop (p. 10-24)
Channel Connection Initial State is Express (For Degree higher than 2 only)
(p. 10-24)
Channel Connection Initial State is Blocked
To set an Express connection when channel connection initial state is Blocked, perform
the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create the relevant cross connection.

To know how to create a cross connection, refer to Performing R-OADM and
Result: On the two relevant WMA boards, the required channel frequency is
assigned to the relevant Express input port number.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-23

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel Connection Initial State is Add & Drop
To set an Express connection when channel connection initial state is Add & Drop,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

(p. 12-12).
Result:
If TR-OADM: on relevant TDMX board, the required channel frequency is

blocked.
On the relevant WMA boards, the relevant channel frequency is assigned to

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create the new cross connection.


E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Channel Connection Initial State is Express (For Degree higher than 2 only)
To set an Express connection when channel connection initial state is Express, perform
the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

(p. 12-12).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create the new cross connection.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-24

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-25
R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMAN1100 Based

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes:
The configuration parameters of an R-OADM with WMA 1100 boards.
The procedure for configuring an R-OADM with WMA 1100 boards.
when you are requested to focus R-OADM configuration on a specific node.

In this context, your R-OADM configuration is based on WMA 1100 boards.
Contents
10-27
10-28
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-26

R-OADM/WMAN1100 Based Configuration Parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R-OADM/WMAN1100 Based Configuration Parameters

R-OADM / WMAN1100 Parameters
On a R-OADM configuration node with WMA 1100 boards, you can

configure/reconfigure channel connections by performing the following actions:
1. to determine Express and Add & Drop channel connections via frequency state as
shown in the following table:
Frequency State Values
Description
Express
The channel goes through the R-OADM node.
AddDrop1
The channel and its associated digital signal is extracted from

WDM line #1 toward client line. Then the channel and a new
digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line #1.
AddDrop2

digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line #2.
AddDrop12

digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line #1
A D the channel and its associated digital signal is extracted
from WDM line #2 toward client line. Then the channel and a
new digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line
#2.
Blocked
The channel is blocked. There is no transmission whatever the

frequency state is.
2. To assign power attenuation for transmission optimization.

See Also
Configuring R-OADM with WMA 1100 Boards (p. 10-28)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-27

Configuring R-OADM with WMAN1100 Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to configure Express and Add & Drop channel
connections in an R-OADM node, WMA 1100 based.
Before you begin
R-OADM configuration must be complete:
Boards are declared and In Service.
Cabling has been configured.
Contradirectionality has been configured.
Update Transmission has been performed.
How to configure R-OADM with WMAN1100 Boards
To configure R-OADM with WMA 1100 boards, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration > R-OADM.

Result: The R-OADM Overview window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the frequency to configure.

Result: The R-OADM Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Assign the relevant State and attenuations for the selected frequency.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat from step 2 as many time as frequencies need to be configured.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Good to Know
To assign a given state to all frequencies, use Global Settings list box.
To assign a given state to pre-selected frequencies, use Selected Settings list box.
To set an attenuation value between input/output of a WMA board, use relevant SET
OTS X > Y buttons, where X and Y are the OTS.
To set an attenuation tolerance to the assigned attenuation, use relevant VAR OTS X >
Y buttons, where X and Y are the OTS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-28

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
R-OADM/WMA 1100 Based Configuration Parameters (p. 10-27)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
10-29
11
11
Overview
Purpose
Transmission is a major topic in the 1626 LM management.

It is a representation of the transmission process with all the involved functional blocks.
From the transmission representation, you can perform a lot of operation tasks such as:
Loopbacks,
Performance Monitoring,
Cross Connections,
etc.
For clarity and relevancy purposes, a special focus has been done on specific operation
management subjects in specific chapters.
This chapter is limited to particular transmission parameters and configuration
procedures.
Contents
11-2
11-2
11-7
11-7
11-9
11-10
11-10
Configuring TTIs
11-12
11-14
11-15
11-16
11-17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Transmission management enables to visualize the different TP (Termination Points)
involved in the transport processing functions supported by the 1626 LM boards.
According to their location in the transport process, 1626 LM boards have OGPI and/or
OTS ports.
OGPI ports
OGPI port is a bidirectional access point for a User-Client or a Line to Mux signal type.
A User-Client signal type is a fixed wavelength to be multiplexed in a Mux.
A Line to Mux signal type is a single or a set of wavelengths to be multiplexed in a Mux.
OTS ports
OTS port is a bidirectional access point for a WDM line signal type.
A WDM line signal transports a set of multiplexed wavelengths.
Figure 11-1, OGPI Ports and Associated Boards (p. 11-3) illustrate the OGPI ports
of 1626 LM boards.
Figure 11-2, OTS Ports and Associated Boards (p. 11-4) illustrates the OTS ports of
1626 LM boards.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 11-1 OGPI Ports and Associated Boards
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 11-2 OTS Ports and Associated Boards
Transport processing functions are compliant with the G.798 and G.709 standards.
In the 1626 LM context, the transport processing functions are represented by:
TTP (Trail Termination Point),
CTP (Connection Termination Point)
TTP (Trail Termination Point)
A TTP represents a point of insertion/extraction of adapted information to a given

network layer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CTP (Connection termination Point)
A CTP represents a point of transfer and adaptation between two network layers.
Table 11-1, TP (Termination Points) (p. 11-5) describes the TP involved in the signal
transport.
Table 11-1
TP (Termination Points)
TP
Meaning
Description
OGPI
Optical Generic Physical Interface
TTP.
The access point for a single wavelength.
Corresponds to the client port. Hosts the
features of the optical port.
OTS
Optical Transport Section
TTP.
The access point for multiplexed wavelength.
Corresponds to the WDM line port. Hosts the
features of the optical port.WDM line signal
type
PGPloch
OCH
Optical Generic Physical Interface / optical

channel
CTP.
Optical Channel
TTP.
The point where the adaptation between OGPI

and OCH occurs.
The point where the optoelectrical conversion
occurs.
OTU
Optical Transmission Unit
TTP.
The points where:
ODU
Optical Data Unit
FEC (Forward Error Correction) is created.
Encapsulation / Decapsulation of G.709

frame takes place.
TM
Trail Monitor
TTP. This is the point where monitoring

information can be red.
RSgdc
Regenerator Section/generic data client
CTP.
The point where adaptation between RS and a
generic client occurs.
In the 1626 LM context, generic client is
Ethernet or Fiber Channel.
RsTTP
Regenerator Section Trail Termination Point
TTP.
The point where SDH encapsulation /
decapsulation occurs.
OMoch
Optical Multiplex Section/optical channel
CTP.
The point where the adaptation between OMS
and OCH occurs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 11-1
TP (Termination Points)
(continued)
TP
Meaning
Description
OMS
Optical Multiplex Section
TTP.
The point where wavelength multiplexing
occurs.
OMSots
Optical Multiplex Section/Adaptation
CTP.
The point where adaptation between OMS and
OTS occurs
OMS-band Optical Multiplex Section/band
CTP.
This is the point where adaptation of a set of
wavelength occurs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The RS-TTI (Regenerator Section - Trail Trace Identifier) is a connectivity control entity
dedicated for SDH frame.
This entity is carried by the RS overhead of the SDH frame via one byte called J0.
You configure the RS-TTI on each node of your transmission network, by indicating how
the J0 byte will be composed.
The RS-TTI is inserted in an SDH frame in the J0 byte at the source of a trail for
transmission.
At the sink of a trail, the received RS-TTI is compared with the expected one. Any
mismatch between the expected value and the received value means that there is an
integrity problem in your transmission process. In this case a TIM (Trail Identifier
Mismatch) alarm is raised.
You configure RS-TTI for the following boards:
ETHC,
2*GBE_FC,
TRBC,
TRBD1191 only.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-7

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 11-2, RS-TTI/J0 Parameters (p. 11-8) gives a description of RS-TTI/J0

configuration parameters.
Table 11-2
RS-TTI/J0
parameters
Description
TX Side/Transmitted
This is the area where you configure the RS-TTI insertion for Ethernet boards only.
In this mode, you configure a RS-TTI which length needs to be greater than 1 byte but
less than 15 bytes.
Mode 1
You must process as follows:

1. You enter a 15 characters word in the entry field, on the right.
2. You calculate the associated transmission error control value type CRC7 (Cyclic
Redundancy Check 7) via the CRC7 button. The CRC7 value is displayed in the
CRC7 field.
3. Optionally, you can configure the expected RS-TTI in the RX Side / Expected area.
Each SDH frame is transmitted with a J0 byte which is successively composed of one
character of the 15 characters word.
At the end of 15 transmissions, the sink node receive the CRC7 code and checks the
consistency between the successive fifteen characters and the corresponding expected
{15 characters word, CRC7 value}.
If the sink node cannot rebuild the 15 characters word, the transmission integrity is not
guaranteed and a TIM (Trail Identifier Mismatch) alarm is raised.
One repeat Byte
In this mode, you enter a one character RS-TTI.

Each SDH frame carries the RS-TTI via the J0 byte. The sink node checks the
consistency between the transmitted and the expected RS-TTI. In case of mismatch, a
TIM (Trail Identifier Mismatch) alarm is raised.
RX Side /Received
This is the area where you see the received RS-TTI.
RX Side /Expected
This is the area where you see the expected RS-TTI.

This area is optional for Ethernet and TRBx boards.
For TRBx boards, this is the area where you configure the expected RS-TTI, if you
decide to monitor it.
By default, the RS-TTI monitoring is disabled.
To enable the RS-TTI configuration, you must:
1. Click STM Mon. Disabled. The button turns to STM Mon. Enabled.
2. Refer to Mode 1 or to One repeat Byte related information to know how to
complete the necessary fields.
See Also
Configuring the RS-TTI/J0 (p. 11-9)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure the RS-TTI/J0.

Before you begin
Transmission view of relevant Ethernet or TRBx board is displayed.
Depending on the type of board, RSTTP or TM transmission block is selected.
How to configure the RS-TTI/J0
To configure the RS-TTI/J0, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click the selected transmission block and select Path Trace Configuration.
Result: The J0 Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
According to the selected board and to your operation rules, complete:
the TX Side / Transmitted area only, or
the TX Side / Transmitted and RX side / expected areas.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To enable RX Side / Expected area, click STM Mon. Disabled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply to finish.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
About RS-TTI and J0 Configuration (p. 11-7)
Table 11-2, RS-TTI/J0 Parameters (p. 11-8)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The various optical TTIs (Trail Trace Identifiers)
Optical TTIs enable to check the connectivity between WDM nodes at different levels:
ODU-TTI (Optical Data Unit TTI) enables to check the matching of data transmitted
between two WDM nodes, through regeneration units.
OTU-TTI (Optical Transport Unit TTI) enables to check the matching of optical
channels connections between two WDM nodes.
OTS-TTI (Optical Transport Section TTI) enables to check the matching of optical
lines between two WDM nodes.
You configure the TTI on each node of your transmission network, by indicating how the
SAPI and DAPI will be composed.
SAPI means Source Address Point Identifier.
DAPI means Destination Address Point Identifier.
SAPI and DAPI enable to identify the source and the destination, both of them in a 16
bytes field.
A specific 32 bytes field is provided for operator use.
The TTI is inserted at the source of a trail for transmission.
At the sink of a trail, the received TTI is compared with the expected one. Any mismatch
between the expected value and the received value means that there is an integrity
problem in your transmission process. In this case a TIM (Trail Identifier Mismatch)
alarm is raised.
You can configure the TTIs as follows:
OTU-TTI applies to TRBC and TRBD boards (10 and 40 Gbps), line side.
OTS-TTI applies to LOFA boards supporting a line/OTS.
ODU-TTI applies to 10 Gbps TRBC and TRBD boards, line side.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-10

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TTI Parameters
Table 11-3
TTI Parameters
TTI Parameters
Description
Received
This is the area where you see the received TTI with received SAPI and DAPI if
configured.
Expected
This is the area where you enter the expected SAPI and DAPI to be received from the
source.
You activate the SAPI and DAPI fields via the associated check boxes.
Sent
This is the area where you enter the SAPI and DAPI to be transmitted to the destination.
You can use for internal use the 32 bytes Specific to operator field.
See Also
Configuring TTIs (p. 11-12)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-11

Configuring TTIs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring TTIs
Purpose
Use this procedure to configure OTU, OTS or ODU TTIs.

Before you begin
According to the TTI you want to configure, you must comply with the following rules:
For OTU-TTI: port#101-OTU transmission block of a TRBC or a TRBD board is

selected.
For OTS-TTI:
If required: LOFA contradirectionality is configured and transmission update is

performed.
OSCU board is installed, declared and cabled.
port#1-OTS transmission block of a reception LOFA board is selected.
For ODU-TTI:
If UNI configuration: port#101-ODU2 transmission block of 10 Gbps
TRBC/TRBD board is selected.

You recognize a U I configuration when port#101-ODU2 transmission block is
linked to port#1-OCH transmission blocks on user/client side.
If NNI configuration: TM(Trail Monitor) of port#101-OTU transmission block of
a TRBD board is selected.
You recognize a
I configuration when port#1-OTU transmission block is
present.
How to configure TTIs
To configure TTIs, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on the relevant transmission block and select:
For OTS-TTI, OTU-TTI and [ODU-TTI (U I configuration)]: Trail Trace

Management>On TP
For ODU-TTI in a
I configuration: Trail Trace Management>On TM.
Result: The Trail Trace Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If required, complete the Expected and/or Sent areas.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-12

Configuring TTIs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) Configuration (p. 11-10)
Table 11-3, TTI Parameters (p. 11-11)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-13

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedure to perform when you want:
to enable or disable the FEC (Forward Error Correction),
to modify the BER (Bit Error Rate).
Contents
11-15
11-16
11-17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-14

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to enable the FEC process.

Before you begin
OCH transmission block of line port is displayed.
FEC is disabled.
How to enable the FEC
To enable the FEC process, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Transmission>Enable FEC.

Result: The OCH transmission block is updated and displays a F.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-15

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to disable the FEC process.

Before you begin
FEC is enabled.
How to disable the FEC
To disable the FEC process, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Transmission>Disable FEC.

Result: The OCH transmission block is updated and the F disappears.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-16

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to modify the BER threshold.

Good to Know
You act on the BER (Bit Error Rate) by configuring the LTCER (Low Threshold
Corrected Error Rate).
Before you begin
FEC is enabled.
How to modify the BER Threshold
To modify the BER threshold, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right click the OCH transmission block of line port and select BER Threshold
Configuration....
Result: The LTCER Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Low Threshold Set list box, select the LTCER value (from 10-3 to 10-8).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
11-17
12
12
Cross
Connection
Management
Overview
Purpose
In the current release, cross connections are used:
in ETHC and TRBD1191 boards,
in splitter boards for R-OADM and TR-OADM configuration.
Cross Connections enable:
to connect ETHC User-Client traffic to lines toward Mux,
to connect ETHC User-Client traffic to TRBD1191 lines,
to enable express or add & drop path in R-OADM and TR-OADM configuration.
This chapter describes the procedure to perform when you want to manage cross
connections.
To have detailed information about cross connections used in specific board configuration
context, refer to the following:
About TRBD1191 Board (p. 9-11)
Chapter 10, R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management.
Contents
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-7
Displaying Cross Connections for a Subrack
12-8
Displaying Cross Connections for a Board
12-9
Creating Cross Connections
12-10
Modifying Cross Connections
12-11
Deleting Cross Connections
12-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
12-1

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic:
gives a quick overview of the different cross connection types,
describes the cross connections parameters.
To have detailed information about cross connections used in specific board configuration
context, refer to the following:
Contents
12-3
12-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
12-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the current release, you establish bidirectional cross connections to connect:
ETHC line to ETHC XFP line (mandatory)
TRBD1191 line to User-Client XFP (mandatory)
ETHC line to TRBD1191 line (depending on configuration) through the backplane
R-OADM and TR-OADM express and add & drop paths.

ote: You cannot modify an existing cross connection.
See Also
Cross Connections Parameters (p. 12-4)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
12-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following table describes the relevant cross connection parameters.
Table 12-1
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Prot. State
Indicates the protection state.
Normal P
Only used in protection context.
Protection path is active. o alarms.

Normal I
Main path is active. o alarms.

Auto P
Protection path is active. Alarms are

raised on the main path.
Auto I
Main path is active. Alarms are

raised on the protection path.
Lockout I
The traffic is locked on the main

path.
The protection is disabled.
Forced P
The traffic is forced on the

protection path. o alarms.
SNCP
For future use.
State
Indicates the state of the cross

connection.
Indicates the cross connection

direction
Uni
Dir.
one.
Active cross connection.
The connection is unidirectional.
Bi
The connection is bidirectional.

Input
Indicates the input point of a cross

connection.
Sequence giving the following

information:
rack#
subrack#
slot#
port#
Termination Point identifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
12-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 12-1
(continued)
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Protecting
Input
Indicates the protecting entity of a

protection system.

information:
Output
Revertive
ot used in cross connection

management context.
rack#
subrack#
Only used for protection

management context.
slot#
port#
Indicates the output point of a cross

connection.
A protection characteristic:
A revertive protection refers to a

mechanism where the transport
and selection of the normal
traffic signal (service) always
returns to (or remains on) the
working transport entity if the
switch requests are terminated;
i.e., when the working transport
entity has recovered from the
defect or the external request is
cleared.

information:
rack#
subrack#
slot#
port#
Checked
The protection is revertive.

Revertive protection refers to
OS CP protection for
User-Client signals. Such
protection type is supported by
40 Gbps transponders and
TRBD1191, 10 Gbps
transponder only.
Unchecked
The protection is not revertive.
A non revertive protection refers

to a mechanism, where the
transport and selection of the
normal traffic signal does not
return to the working transport
entity if the switch requests are
terminated.
Only used for protection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
12-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 12-1
(continued)
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
WRT
Wait to Restore Time.
0 to 60,000 seconds
A period of time that must elapse

before a transport entity that has
recovered from a Signal Fail (SF) or
Signal Degrade (SD) condition can
be used again to transport the normal
traffic signal and/or to select the
normal traffic signal from.
HOT
Hold Of Time.
0 to 10,000 milliseconds
A delay that prevents an autonomous

switch of a protected channel to the
protecting path for the configured
time following identification that an
autonomous protection switch is
required.
See Also
About Cross Connections (p. 12-2)
Cross Connection Types (p. 12-3)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
12-6

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the procedure to perform when you want to manage cross
connections.
Contents
12-8
12-9
12-10
12-11
12-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
12-7

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display cross connections at subrack level.

Before you begin

How to display cross connections for a subrack
To display cross connection for a subrack, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration > Cross Connection Management.

Result: The Cross Connection Management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Search.
Result: The list of existing cross connections appears.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
12-8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display cross connections at board level.

Before you begin
Transmission View window of the relevant board is displayed.
How to display cross connections for a board
To display cross connections for a board, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Transmission View window, identify the transmission blocks with a cross.
Result: The cross indicates that a cross connection is effective between the two
blocks.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the transmission block indicating a cross connection and right-click Cross
Connection>Cross Connection Management.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
12-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to create cross connections.

Before you begin
Transmission View of eligible board is displayed.
You know the type of TP to cross connect.
How to create cross connections
To create cross connections, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the input TP.

Result: The selected TP is highligthed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click and select Cross Connection>Create Cross Connection.

Result: The Main Cross Connection window is displayed. The input field is prefilled
with the selected TP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Choose... to select the output TP.

Result: The Choose a Cross Connectable TP window is displayed and lists the
relevant TP available for cross connection.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant output TP and click OK.

Result: The Main Cross Connection window is refreshed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK to finish.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
12-10

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to modify protection cross connections.

Before you begin
You can modify cross connections only if they are revertive. Revertive cross
connections refer to OS CP protection for User-Client signals. Such protection type
is supported by 40 Gbps transponders and TRBD1191, 10 Gbps transponder only.
How to modify cross connections
To modify cross connections, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Cross Connection Management.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Search
Result: The list of existing cross connections appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identify the cross connections dedicated to protection: Protecting Input column filled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant row.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Modify.
Result: The Main Cross Connection window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modify one of the following:
Revertive:If you uncheck the box, the protection becomes non revertive.
WTR:The Wait to Restore Time. You can modify the value of this parameter.
HOT:The Hold Off Time. You can modify the value of this parameter.
To know more about these parameters, refer to Cross Connections Parameters (p. 12-4)
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
12-11

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to delete cross connections.

Before you begin

How to delete cross connections
To delete cross connections, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Cross Connection>Create Cross Connection.

Result: The Cross Connection Managementwindow is displayed and lists the
existing cross connections.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the cross connection to delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK to confirm the deletion.

Result: The cross connection disappears from the list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
12-12
13
13
Connector
and Cabling
Management
Overview
Purpose
Connectors are the interfaces which enable the cabling:
among the 1626 LM boards,
with external transmission devices.
This chapter describes the procedures to perform when you want:
to set in/out of service connectors,
to declare the cabling between two connectors.
to export the cabling configuration to an XML file.
Contents
13-2
Setting Connectors Out Of Service
13-3
13-4
13-5
Exporting the Cabling Configuration to an XML File
13-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
13-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to set connectors in service.

Before you begin
The connectors are not in service.
How to set connectors in service
To set connectors in service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration > Connectors/Cabling...

Result: The Connectors Configuration window appears.
The list of racks, subracks, boards and channels are displayed in a tree structure. For
each of these managed entities, you can expand or collapse the tree via + or - signs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, expand the tree until the relevant board.

Result: The connectors appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant connectors.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Set In Service.

Result: The connector status becomes In Service (Red Padlock is displayed).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
13-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to set connectors out of service.

Before you begin
The connectors are in service.
How to set connectors out of service
To set connectors out of service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration > Connectors/Cabling...

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant connectors.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Set Out Of Service.

Result: The connector status becomes Out Of Service (Red Padlock is not displayed).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
13-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to configure the cabling between 2 connectors.

Before you begin
If you run SPLM for line optimization, any action on Rx and Tx Tributary
connections at physical or configuration level, requires SPLM synchronization.
How to configure the cabling between 2 connectors
To configure the cabling between 2 connectors, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Connectors/Cabling...
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Cable row, select the cell corresponding to the connector to connect.
Result: The two cells corresponding to input and output channels are highlighted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, on the left, expand the tree until the relevant board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Cable row, select a cell corresponding to the connector to connect with.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Add Cable.

Result: Two arrows appears, representing the cabling configuration direction.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
13-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to delete the cabling between 2 connectors.

Before you begin
If you run SPLM for line optimization, any action on Rx and Tx Tributary
connections at physical or configuration level, requires SPLM synchronization.
How to delete the cabling between 2 connectors
To delete the cabling between 2 connectors, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Connectors/Cabling...
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Cable row, select the cell corresponding to the connector to connect.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Delete Cable.

Result: Two arrows disappear from the input and output channel cells.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
13-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to export the cabling configuration of a rack to an
XML file.
Before you begin
Cabling has been configured.
The required rack view is displayed
How to export the cabling configuration to an XML file
To export the cabling configuration to an XML file, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Equipment > Instantaneous Measurements on > Selected Object.

Result: The Instantaneous Measurements window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Export Cabling to XML

Result: A browsing window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the location where you want to save the XML file and click OK.
Result: The cabling configuration is saved into an XML file.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
13-6
14
Loopback Tests
14
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the parameters and procedures to follow when you want to
perform loopbacks for test purposes.
Contents
About Loopbacks
14-2
Introducing Loopbacks
14-2
14-3
14-5
Managing loopbacks
14-6
14-7
Creating Loopbacks
14-8
Deleting Loopbacks
14-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
14-1
Loopback Tests
About Loopbacks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About Loopbacks
Loopbacks are performed for troubleshooting purposes to identify faults in the
transmission path with the help of an external test device. The external test device is used
to compare the outgoing and returning signals. The result of the loopback is shown on the
external test device.
In the current release, you can create:
a loopback and continue test on:
OGPI ports / WDM side of ETHC, 2xGBE_FC or 10 Gbps TRBC/TRBD boards.
OGPI ports / User-Client side of 40 Gbps TRBC boards and 10 Gbps

TRBC/TRBD boards.
a loopback and cut test on:
OGPI ports / WDM side of 40 Gbps TRBC/TRBD boards.
OGPI ports / User-Client side of ETHC and 40Gbps TRBD boards .
Important! You cannot create a loopback on both user and line sides at the same
time.
Figure 14-1, Loopback and Continue User/Client Side (p. 14-2) and Figure 14-2,
Loopback and Continue Line Side (p. 14-3) illustrate loopback and continue
concept.
Figure 14-3, Loopback and Cut Line Side (p. 14-3) illustrates loop and cut concept.
Figure 14-1 Loopback and Continue User/Client Side
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
14-2
Loopback Tests
About Loopbacks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 14-2 Loopback and Continue Line Side
Figure 14-3 Loopback and Cut Line Side
See Also
Loopback Parameters in Display Mode (p. 14-3)
Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode (p. 14-5)
Displaying Existing Loopbacks (p. 14-7)
Creating Loopbacks (p. 14-8)
Deleting Loopbacks (p. 14-9)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
14-3
Loopback Tests
About Loopbacks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table describes loopback parameters in display mode.

Table 14-1
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Initial TP
Identifies the TP supporting the

loopback.

information:
Destination TP
In loopback context, this entity is the

same as the initial TP.
ot used in the current release.
LoopType
Directionality
Specific type of loopback.
rack#
subrack#
slot#
port#

information:
rack#
subrack#
slot#
port#
Loop And Continue
Loop And Cut
one.
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
14-4
Loopback Tests
About Loopbacks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following table describes loopback parameters in creation mode.
Table 14-2
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Seleted TP
Identifies the TP supporting the

loopback.

information:
This parameter is automatically

filled when you create a loopback
from the Transmission View.
rack#
subrack#
slot#
port#
Loopback
Actions
one.
Timed
Loopbacks
one.
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
14-5
Loopback Tests
Managing loopbacks
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing loopbacks
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to manage loopbacks.
Contents
14-7
Creating Loopbacks
14-8
Deleting Loopbacks
14-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
14-6
Loopback Tests
Managing loopbacks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display existing loopbacks.

Before you begin

How to display existing loopbacks
To display existing loopbacks, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Loopback Management.

Result: The Signal Loopback Management window is displayed and displays the
current loopbacks list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
14-7
Loopback Tests
Managing loopbacks
Creating Loopbacks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating Loopbacks
Purpose
Use this procedure to create loopbacks.

Before you begin
Transmission View window of eligible board is displayed
How to create loopbacks
To create loopbacks, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant OGPI block.

Result: The selected OGPI block is highligthed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click and select Loopback > Port Loopback Configuration.

Result: The Port Loopbacks Configuration window is displayed with the
Termination Point field prefilled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK to confirm the loopback creation.

Result: The Transmission View window is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
14-8
Loopback Tests
Managing loopbacks
Deleting Loopbacks
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deleting Loopbacks
Purpose
Use this procedure to delete loopbacks.

Before you begin

How to delete loopbacks
To delete loopbacks, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Loopback Management.

Result: The Signal Loopback Management window is displayed and displays the
current loopbacks list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the list, select the loopback to delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Delete.
Result: The loopback disappears from the list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
14-9
15
15
Overview
Purpose
The 1626 LM is designed to provide uninterrupted service in all circumstances. The

system's protection function reacts automatically to signal failures or to abnormal
situations which may be due to circumstances outside the 1626 LM.
This chapter describes:
the 1626 LM protection principles,
the procedures to perform when you want to manage protection mechanisms.
Contents
15-2
15-3
15-10
15-11
Managing Protection
15-13
Protection Displayed Information
15-14
Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection
15-17
15-18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-1

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the principles and the necessary information you must know to be
able to manage 1626 LM protection.
Contents
15-3
15-10
15-11
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSNCP
Client signal and related transponder protection is driven by OSCP (Optical

Subetwork Connection Protection).
OSCP completely protects the optical path, including cable, amplifiers, mux/demux and
transponders. A high level of reliability is obtained by complete duplication of the
transmission hardware:
On the transmitting side, an optical splitter (in an OCPU board) duplicates the client
signal for the working and protection lines before the connection to the transponders.
On the Receiving side, both transponders are connected to a coupler in the same
OCPU board. The received signal to be sent to client equipment is selected by
switching on the laser (transmitting toward the client) on one transponder, while the
laser of the other transponder is switched off.
In the current release, OSCP protection is implemented as illustrated in Figure 15-1,

OSCP Principles (p. 15-3)
Figure 15-1 OSCNP Principles
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSNCP Mechanism
In normal operation, when protection is activated, only the "receive" laser on the main
transponder is switched on while the corresponding laser on the spare transponder is
switched off. The signal from the main transponder is sent to the client via the OCPU
board.
In case of failure detected by the main transponder, the receiving main transponder laser
is switched off. The spare transponder laser is switched on via the backplane link which
enables communication between main and spare transponders. The signal from the spare
transponder is sent to the client via the OCPU board as illustrated in Figure 15-2,
OSCP Activation (p. 15-4)
Figure 15-2 OSNCP Activation
Attention: OSNCP switching within 50 ms from the original fault is not possible
in the following circumstances:
UE alarm is raised.
50 ms switching is not possible because the UE counter is examined every second.

In this particular situation, OSCP switching triggers between 50 ms and more
than 1 s.
Loss of user/client signal at the far-end NE.
In this case, the far-end transponder inserts an AIS, which triggers a protection
switch on the near-end E. Although the protection mechanism reacts in less than
50 ms in the near-end E, the total interruption of service can be slightly higher
than 50 ms because it includes the detection time of the original fault on the
far-end, and the propagation time of the AIS signal from the far-end E to the
near-end E.
ote: OSCP revertive protection is implemented for the following boards only:
40 Gbps transponders,
TRBD1191 (10 Gbps transponder).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Revertive Protection
Revertive protection refers to a mechanism where the transport and selection of the
normal traffic signal (service) always returns to (or remains on) the working transport
entity if the switch requests are terminated; i.e., when the working transport entity has
recovered from the defect or the external request is cleared.
Non Revertive Protection
on revertive protection refers to a mechanism, where the transport and selection of the
normal traffic signal does not return to the working transport entity if the switch requests
are terminated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OMSP
WDM lines and related amplifier protection is driven by OMSP (Optical Multiplex
Section Protection).
OMSP completely protects the transmission line with the exception of transponders and
mux/demux. This type of protection is suitable to prevent traffic interruption in case of
damage to the transmission fiber cable . As transponders and mux/demux are not
duplicated, OMSP is an alternative to OSCP at a lower cost, but does not protect against
equipment failures.
OMSP requires the following equipment:
an OCPU 2100 board which implements a split and a switch function,
a PSCU board which acts as a secondary protection controller and manages the OCPU
boards.
an OSCU 1010 board which acts as a PSCU controller. The OSCU 1010 must have
the required functional variant to comply with OMSP.
In the current release, 1+1 non revertive protection is implemented as illustrated in figure
Figure 15-3, Example of OMSP Implementation (p. 15-6)
Figure 15-3 Example of OMSP Implementation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OMSP Mechanisms
In normal operation, when protection is activated, both receiving laser amplifiers are
working. Only the main amplifier is connected to the demultiplexer via the receiving
OCPU switch.
The OMSP switching event is triggered by:
LOS detected on the site where the OMSP switching takes place if the affected span is
adjacent to the node itself.
OMS-FDI forwarding on the OSC to signal a line failure on a remote span.
The following figure illustrates the two OMSP switching cases.

Figure 15-4 OMSP Switching cases
On detection of such failures, the receiving OSCU board communicates with PSCU board
via the backplane to request the receiving OCPU board to switch to the spare amplifier.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-7

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transponder and Amplifier Boards
Depending on the type of protection, transponder and amplifier boards must follow
specific engineering rules.
OSNCP context
In OSCP context, transponder and amplifier boards work by pairs. According to the slot
it is plugged in, a receiving board is either:
a main or protected board, if it is plugged in an odd numbered slot, or
a spare or protecting board, if it is plugged in an even numbered slot.
OMSP context
In OMSP context:
Amplifier boards can be placed anywhere in the shelf where the OSCU board is
present. Via a configuration register, OSCU board is informed of the positions of
amplifier boards that communicate with it.
PSCU board must be placed in slot 39.
Protection Control
As an operator, you can:
force the traffic onto the spare board.

The traffic is handled by the spare/protecting board.
lock the traffic onto the main board.

The traffic is exclusively handled by the main board. In this case the system behaves
as if there was no protection.
cancel the force action.
cancel the lock action.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Protection Implementation
In the 1626 LM, 1+1 protection is viewed as a set of cross connections that are
automatically created after board cabling. Cross connections are created among the
following entities:
Input
This entity corresponds to the main or protected channel.
In OS CP context: it is given by the TP and the physical OCPU port connected

to the main transponder board.
In OMSP context: it is given by the TP and the physical port location of the main
amplifier board.
Protecting input
This entity corresponds to the spare or protected channel.
In OS CP context: it is given by the TP and the physical OCPU port connected

to the spare transponder board.
In OMSP context: it is given by the TP and the physical port location of the spare
amplifier board.
Output
Depending on the type of protection, this entity may represent either one of the
following:
In OS CP context: represents the OCPU board which routes the signal to the
User-Client network. It is given by the TP and the physical port location of this
OCPU board.
In OMSP context: points to the line input port of the client board. In fixed
configurations it is a mux/demux board. In flexible configurations, it is a coupler
board.
As an operator, you can manage protection cross-connections only for OSCP protection
if you need to change parameters related to revertive mode.
See Also
Recommended Board Location (p. 15-10)
The Protection Activation Process (p. 15-11)
Protection Displayed Information (p. 15-14)
Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection (p. 15-17)
Controlling Protection (p. 15-18)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OSCP and OMSP protection commissioning consists in a hardware installation and a
cabling declaration.
Client lines will be protected by OSCP only if the boards are placed in specific slots.
At the same time, OCPU board location determines which transponders and amplifiers to
supervise.
To enable the protection mechanisms, you must comply with:
the recommended OCPU, TRBx, PSCU3x locations noted in the installation guide,
and
the recommended cabling plan.
Protection Principles (p. 15-3)
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-10

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

To activate the protection functions, you must follow the following sequence of actions:
1. You must have the recommended installation engineering rules and cabling plan of
your configuration.
2. Install the required boards into the recommended slots.
OSNCP Case
Plug TRBD/C and OCPU boards following

the recommended engineering rules.
Do not forget: TRBD/C work by pairs.
According to the slot it is plugged in, a

TRBD/C board is either:
a main or protected board, if it is
plugged in an odd numbered slot, or
a spare or protecting board, if it is
plugged in an even numbered slot.
OMSP Case
Plug LOFA, OCPU, OSCU and PSU boards

following the recommended engineering
rules.
Do not forget:
Amplifier boards can be placed

anywhere in the shelf where the
OSCU board is present. Via a
configuration register, OSCU board
is informed of the positions of
amplifier boards that communicate
with it.
PSCU board must be placed in slot
39.
3. Declare and configure the required boards.

ATTENTION: In case of TRBD1191 transponders in an OSCP configuration, you
must imperatively perform TRBD1191 internal cross connections before declaring the
cabling between TRBD1191 and OCPU boards.
4. Perform the physical cabling.
OSNCP Case
Perform boards cabling following the

cabling plan:
a. OCPU and main TRBD/C Client
ports.
b. OCPU and spare TRBD/C Client
ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-11

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OMSP Case
Perform boards cabling following the

cabling plan:
a. OSCU and amplifiers.
b. Amplifiers and OCPU.
c. OCPU and Mux/Demux or relevant
coupler.
Do not forget:
Main LOFA OSC EXTRACTION port

must be cabled to OSCU OSC
Channel 1 INPUT port.
Main LOFA OSC INSERTION port
Channel 1 OUTPUT port.
Spare LOFA OSC EXTRACTION port
Channel 2 INPUT port.
Spare LOFA OSC INSERTION port
Channel 2 OUTPUT port.
5. Set connectors in service.

6. Declare cabling configuration in compliance with the recommended engineering rules.
7. Update the transmission view.
8. End.
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-12
Managing Protection
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing Protection
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the displayed information and procedures to perform when you want
to manage 1626 LM protection.
Contents
15-14
15-17
15-18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-13
Managing Protection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 15-1, Protection Parameters (p. 15-14) describes the information displayed for
protection.
Table 15-1
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Prot. State
Indicates the protection state.
Normal P
Protection path is active. o alarms.

Normal I
Main path is active. o alarms.

Auto P
Protection path is active. Alarms are

raised on the main path.
Auto I
Main path is active. Alarms are raised

on the protection path.
Lockout I
The traffic is locked onto the main

path.
The protection is disabled.
Forced P
The traffic is forced onto the protection

path. o alarms.
SNCP
For future use.
one.
State
Indicates the state of the cross

connection.
Indicates the cross connection

direction
Uni
Dir.
Active cross connection.

The connection is unidirectional.
Bi
The connection is bidirectional.

Input
This entity corresponds to the main

or protected channel.
In OS CP context: it is given
by the TP and the physical
OCPU port connected to the
main board.
In OMSP context: it is given
by the TP and the physical port
location of the main board.

information:
rack#
subrack#
slot#
port#
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-14
Managing Protection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 15-1
(continued)
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Protecting
Input
This entity corresponds to the spare

or protected channel.

information:
Output
rack#
subrack#
slot#
In OMSP context: it is given

by the TP and the physical port
location of the spare amplifier
board.
port#
Depending on the type of

protection, this entity may
represents one of the following:
Revertive
In OS CP context: it is given
by the TP and the physical
OCPU port connected to the
spare transponder board.
In OS CP context: represents
the OCPU board which routes
the signal to the User-Client
network. It is given by the TP
and the physical port location
of the related OCPU board.
rack#
subrack#
slot#
port#
Checked
In OMSP context: points to a

port of the client board (the
line input port).
A protection characteristic:

information:
Revertive protection refers to a

mechanism where the transport
and selection of the normal
traffic signal (service) always
returns to (or remains on) the
working transport entity if the
switch requests are terminated;
i.e., when the working
transport entity has recovered
from the defect or the external
request is cleared.
The protection is revertive.

Revertive protection refers to
OSCP protection for User-Client
signals. Such protection type is
supported by 40 Gbps transponders
and TRBD1191, 10 Gbps
transponder only.
Unchecked
The protection is not revertive.
on revertive protection refers

to a mechanism, where the
transport and selection of the
normal traffic signal does not
return to the working transport
entity if the switch requests are
terminated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-15
Managing Protection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 15-1
(continued)
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
WRT
Wait to Restore Time.
0 to 60,000 seconds
A period of time that must elapse

before a transport entity that has
recovered from a Signal Fail (SF)
or Signal Degrade (SD) condition
can be used again to transport the
normal traffic signal and/or to
select the normal traffic signal
from.
HOT
Hold Off Time.
0 to 10,000 milliseconds
A delay that prevents an

autonomous switch of a protected
channel to the protecting path for
the configured time following
identification that an autonomous
protection switch is required.
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-16
Managing Protection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to identify cross connections dedicated to protection purposes.

Before you begin

How to recognize cross connections dedicated to protection
To recognize cross connection dedicated to protection, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Search to display cross connections.

Result: The existing cross connections are displayed in the display area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identify the cross connections dedicated to protection with the Protecting Input column.
Any filled cell is related to a protection mechanism.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-17
Managing Protection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure to control 1626 LM protection.

Before you begin
Protection is implemented on the 1626 LM.

How to control protection
To control protection, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Search to display cross connections.

Result: The existing cross connections are displayed in the display area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select a relevant row and click Protect...

Result: The Protection Actions window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To force the traffic onto the protecting board, go to Step 5.
To lock the traffic onto the main transponder board, go to Step 6.
To cancel a force action, go to Step 7.
To cancel a lock action, go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To force the traffic on the protecting board:

1. Click Protecting related to Force To: item.
2. Click OK to finish.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To lock the traffic on the main board:

1. Click Invoke related to Lock Out: item.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-18
Managing Protection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To cancel a lock action:

1. Click Release related to Force To: item.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To cancel a force action:

1. Click Release related to Lock Out: item.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
15-19
16
16
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedure to perform when you want to display:
Instantaneous measurements,
Abnormal condition list,
Event logs,
Channel margin states,
Power level per channel frequency.
Contents
16-2
Displaying the Abnormal Condition List
16-6
16-7
16-8
Displaying Power Level per Channel Frequency
16-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
16-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display instantaneous measurements.

Good to know
The following table list the main instantaneous measurements by boards.

Board
Measurement
Measured for...
ESCT
Temperature
whole board
BMDX
Temperature
whole board
CMDX
Reception Power
Each Mux Inputs
Demux Input
Mux Output
OMDX
Temperature
whole board
Reception Power
WDM Line Input
Extra Input
Each Mux Inputs
Expansion Input
(OMDX8100_L1_x only)
Transmission Power
WDM Line Output
Temperature
whole board
Transmission Power
WDM Line Output
OSCU
Temperature
whole board
LOFA
Theoretical Flatness Constant
whole board
Temperature
whole board
Reception Power
External Pump Input Port

(when applicable)
VOA Attenuation
whole board
Transmission Power
1rst and 2nd Stage Output
Reception Power
1rst and 2nd Stage Input
Temperature
whole board
ALCT
EMPM
Pump bias current
Laser temperature
Pump Power
Laser Module
EMPM Output
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
16-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board
Measurement
Measured for...
BOFA
Temperature
whole board
Reception Power
Gain Block Input
Transmission Power
Gain Block Output
Temperature
whole board
Reception Power
SFP Input
XFP Input
SFP Output
XFP Output
SFP Output
XFP Output
ETHC
Transmission Power
Current
TRBD 10 Gbps
Temperature
whole board
Reception Power
Client and WDM Line

Input
XFP Input (when

applicable)
WDM Line Output
XFP Output (when

applicable)
Transmission Power
TRBC 10 Gbps
TRBD 40 Gbps
Current
XFP Output (when

applicable)
Temperature
whole board
Reception Power
WDM Line Input
Transmission Power
WDM Line Output
Temperature
whole board
WDM Line Input
Reception Power
Client and WDM Line Input
Transmission Power
WDM Line Output
Current
ot applicable
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
16-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board
Measurement
Measured for...
TRBC 40 Gbps
Temperature
whole board
WDM Line Input
Reception Power
Client and WDM Line

Input
XFP Input (when

applicable)
WDM Line Output
XFP Output (when

applicable)
Transmission Power
OADC
OCNC
TDMX
WMAN
Current
XFP Output (when

applicable)
Temperature
whole board
Reception Power
Each Input ports
Splitter Input
(OADC1230 and
OADC1300 only)
Transmission Power
Coupler Output (OADC0104

only)
Temperature
whole board
Reception Power
Splitter Input
Temperature
whole board
Reception Power
WDM Line Input
Transmission Power
Each channel output
Temperature
whole board
Reception Power
When applicable:
Transmission Power
WDM Line Input
Each Wavelength
Manager Input
When applicable:
WDM Line Output
Wavelength Blocker
Output
Each Wavelength
Selective Switch input
Wavelength Manager
Input
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
16-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Before you begin
Equipment view window is displayed.
Rack view window is displayed, or
Board view window is displayed, or
How to display instantaneous measurements
To display instantaneous measurements, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Depending on the current view, select one of the following:
Equipment > Instantaneous Measurements on > Selected Object.
Board > Current Instantaneous Measurements

Result: The Instantaneous Measurements window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note
If the window has been opened for a certain time, click Refresh to update the
measurement values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
16-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display the abnormal condition list.

Good to know
The abnormal condition list provides the list of all abnormal situations.
The following lists examples of abnormal situations which are reported into the abnormal
situation list:
An equipment which is plugged but not configured,
A loopback on a port,
APSD forced on or forced off on an amplifier,
etc....
Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is displayed.

How to display the abnormal condition list
To display the abnormal condition list, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Diagnosis > Abnormal Condition List

Result: The Abnormal Condition List window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select an abnormal condition and click OK.

Result: Detailed information is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
16-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display event logs.

Good to know
The 1626 LM is keeping track of all operations or events.

You can retrieve:
command operations which have been performed in the system,
alarms which have been raised,
events which have been tracked.
Before you begin

How to display the event logs
To display event logs, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the following:
Diagnosis>Command Log,
Diagnosis>Alarm Log,
Diagnosis>Event Log,
Result: According to your choice, a text file list all the related items.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
16-7
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display the channel margin.

Good to know
The channel margin formulates the available margin that a channel has before the
FEC mechanism cannot correct errors.
The channel margin is measured in dB and you can decide whether you want to
display it on a 5 or 30 seconds basis.
To quickly identify and anticipate transmission problems, each channel is displayed
with a specific color which corresponds to a specific state as explained in the
following table.
For R-OADM and TR-OADM configurations, cross-connections must be performed.
See Also
Performing R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections (p. 10-17)

Table 16-1

Description
The channel has transmission errors which are corrected by the
FEC mechanism. Error rate is within acceptable range.
The channel has transmission errors which are corrected by the
FEC mechanism. Error rate is very low.
The channel has transmission errors which are not corrected by
the FEC mechanism. The FEC correction limit has been reached
or exceeded. Service is affected.
Current and previous BER values differ by more than a decade.
This indicates the channel has unstable transmission conditions.
The service may be affected.
Channel margin not correct:
The data collection period is different from 5 or 30 sec. Ask

for a new channel margin calculation to confirm a
transmission problem.
The number of transmission errors is too high.

The FEC correction limit has been reached or exceeded and
cannot correct errors anymore. The service is affected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
16-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Before you begin
FEC mechanism is enabled on TRBx boards.
For T-OADM configurations, cross-connections must be performed.
Your configuration has at least one LOFA board.
How to display the channel margin
To display the channel margin, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Diagnosis > Counters

Result: The Digital Counters window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Choose OTS and Counters area, select an OTS port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click one of the following radio buttons:
Near End 30s Channel Margin
Near End 5s Channel Margin

Result: Click Apply.
Channel identifiers and associated channel margins are displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
16-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to monitor and to display the channel power per port.
Spectrum Acquisition
To display measured power level (dBm) per channel frequency, you must use the
Spectrum Acquisition option that Board option provides.
You can only display power level per channel frequency for WMA boards.
Power levels are displayed as bar charts.
Power Measure
On WMA1100 boards, power measure is performed on:
Input port and
Output port.
On WMA3x, power measure is performed on:
3 input ports and
1 output port.
Displaying tabs, colored bullets and colored bars
Power measures by channel are displayed in tabs. One tab per port displays the measured
power spectrum. If the bullet associated to a tab is:
Red: there is at least one channel which measured power is less than the minimum
configured value.
Green: there is no control to perform. All the measures are compliant with the
configuration.
The same applies for graphical bars which represent graphically the power measure for
each channel.
Before you begin
Remind that this procedure applies only on WMA boards.

How to display measured power level per channel frequency
To display measured power level (dBm) per channel frequency, perform the following
steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Subrack Viewwindow, double click a WMA board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
16-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The WMAN Board View window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From Boardmenu, select Spectrum Acquisition.

Result: The Spectrum Acquisition window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on the required tab to display power level per channel frequency associated to one
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Refresh to launch a new power level acquisition.

ote: To display up to date power levels, you must click Refresh when you navigate
from one tab to another.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor on a bar to display the measured values.

At the limit of the bar, you can display the following:
OVER MAX: when the measured value exceeds the maximum configured value.
BELOW MIN: when the measured value is less than the configured value.
INVALID: when a problem has occurred.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
16-11
17
17
Overview
Purpose
Quality of service delivered by the 1626 LM is directly related to your capacity to

respond to performance issues of your system.
In addition to equipment and transmission alarms, you have at your disposal specific
alarms to warn you on performance degradation of your transmission process.
This chapter describes the performance monitoring means and procedures to perform
when you want to monitor your system.
Contents
17-3
17-4
17-7
Counter Thresholds
17-8
17-9
17-11
17-12
Modifying Counter Threshold Tables
17-13
17-14
Starting Performance Monitoring (PM)
17-15
17-17
17-18
17-19
Creating a Trail Monitor (TM)
17-20
Deleting a Trail Monitor (TM)
17-21
17-22
Performance Current Data Displayed Information
17-23
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-1
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-24
17-25
17-26
Refreshing Current Counter Values
17-27
17-28
Managing Performance Monitoring From a Unique Entry Point
17-29
Understanding the PM Overview Window
17-30
17-31
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-2

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
Performance monitoring increments performance counters for the following protocols and
correction methods:
SDH/ RS - Layer 1,
Ethernet 1 Gbps - Layer 1 and Layer 2 (MAC),
Ethernet 10 Gbps - Layer 1 and Layer 2 (MAC),
FEC/OCH,
ODU2.
Contents
17-4
17-7
Counter Thresholds
17-8
17-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
There are two types of performance counters:
Time counters
Time counters count how many seconds an error is present in the system for a given
period,
Error counters
Error counters count the number of errors reported for a given period.
Frame counters (Ethernet Layer 2 specific)
Frame counters count the number of received, emitted, lost, errored frames:
since ETHC board provisioning,
for a given period of time.
The following table describes the counters for each monitored layer.
Table 17-1
Monitored
Protocols / Error
Correction
Method
Counters Description
SDH/RS
ES
Erroneous Seconds
ES counts the number of seconds of presence in the system of:
SES
B1 code violation, or
SDH/RS defects.
Severely Erroneous Seconds
SES counts the number of seconds of presence in the system of:
more than 2400 B1 code violations per second, or
SDH/RS defects.
In the meantime, ES is still incremented.

BBE
Background Block Errors
BBE counts the number of B1 code violations excluding those taken into
account by SES counter.
UAS
UnAvailable Seconds
UAS counts the number of seconds of UnAvailable Time (UAT) during a

monitoring period. UAT period starts when 10 consecutive SES are reported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 17-1
Monitored
Protocols / Error
Correction
Method
Ethernet - Layer 1
ES
(continued)
Erroneous Seconds
ES counts the number of seconds of presence in the system of:
(1 and 10 Gbps)
SES
ICG (Invalid Code Group) for Ethernet 1 Gbps,
HCV (Header Code Violation) for Ethernet 10 Gbps,
Ethernet defects.
SES counts the number of seconds of presence in the system of:
more than 10,000 ICG per second for Ethernet 1 Gbps
more than 255 HCV per second for Ethernet 10 Gbps,
at least one Ethernet defect.
In the meantime, ES is still incremented.

BBE
BBE counts the number of:
UAS
ICG excluding those counted by SES counter for Ethernet 1 Gbps,
HCV excluding those counted by SES counter for Ethernet 10 Gbps.
UnAvailable Seconds

Ethernet - Layer 2
TRCF
Total Received Correct Frames
TRCF counts the number of valid frames received by each Ethernet port.
(1 Gbps)
TRCF sums the number of received unicast, multicast and broadcast frames.
TRCO
Total Received Correct Octets
TRCO counts the number of valid bytes received by each Ethernet port.
TRSEF
Total Received Service Errored Frames
TRSEF counts the number of errored frames received by each Ethernet port.
TTF
Total Transmitted Frames
TTF counts the number of frames transmitted by each Ethernet port.

TTF sums the number of transmitted unicast, multicast and broadcast
frames.
TTO
Total Transmitted Octets
TTO counts the number of bytes transmitted by each Ethernet port.

TDF
Total Dropped Frames
TDF counts the number of frames dropped by each Ethernet port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 17-1
Monitored
Protocols / Error
Correction
Method
FEC/OCH
SCS
(continued)
Severely Corrected Seconds
SCS counts the number of seconds spent to correct errors just before the
FEC correction limit.
SCS integrates also the immediate period after the FEC correction limit
where the errors are not corrected.
SUS
Severely Uncorrected Seconds
SUS counts the number of seconds of presence of FEC/OCH layer defects in

the system.
BEC
Background Errors Corrected
BEC counts the number of corrected errors excluding those taken into
account by SCS counter.
UAS
UnAvailable Seconds

monitoring period. UAT period starts when 10 consecutive SUS are reported.
BBU
Background Block Uncorrected
BBU counts the number of uncorrected blocks, excluding those taken into
account by SUS counter.
ODU2
SES
SES counts the number of seconds of presence in the system of more than
12,303 errored ODU frames (15% of ODU frames).
NEUAS
Near End UnAvailable Seconds
EUAS counts the number of seconds of UnAvailable Time (UAT) during a

This counter is similar to the UAS counter refering to other layers.
BBE
BBE counts the number of Bip-8 code violations excluding those taken into
account by SES counter.
See Also
Performance Monitoring Mechanism (p. 17-7)
Counter Thresholds (p. 17-8)
Managing Counter Threshold Tables (p. 17-11)
Managing Performance Monitoring (p. 17-14)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performance Current Data Displayed Information (p. 17-23)
Performance History Data Displayed Information (p. 17-24)

Performance monitoring is based on counter value collection which triggers every 15
minutes from 00:00 UTC for a 24 hours period.
To be able to use counter data, you must start the performance monitoring mechanism on
the required termination point.
During the start operation, you specify:
If you want to save the counter values every 15 minutes and/or every 24 hours. At the
end of the defined period, counter values are logged into a history file. Counter values
are then reset to 0, to increment again for a new period.
If you want to use thresholds to raise a TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm) and its
related PM-AS (Performance Monitoring - Alarm Synthesis).
If not, performance monitoring will work and counters will increment on the selected
period basis, but no alarm will be raised.
You can modify your initial settings during performance monitoring execution.
See Also
Possible Counter Threshold Values (p. 17-9)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-7

Counter Thresholds
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Counter Thresholds
For each of the monitored layers, you manage counter threshold values via 2 tables:
threshold table related to 15 minutes period,
threshold table related to 24 hours period.
For the threshold table related to 15 minutes period, each counter has:
an alarm triggering threshold value, and
an alarm clearing threshold value.
In the 1626 LM context:
the alarm triggering threshold value is called Value Up,
the alarm clearing threshold value is called Value Down.
When Value Up is reached or exceeded, a TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm) is raised and
triggers a PM-AS (Performance Monitoring - Alarm Synthesis) with a severity level. You
can configure the severity of the raised alarms.
The alarms are cleared as soon as the Value Down is reached.
Figure 17-1, CA/PM-AS Raise and Clear Logic (p. 17-8) illustrates TCA/PM-AS raise
and clear logic.
Figure 17-1 CA/PM-AS Raise and Clear Logic
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-8

Counter Thresholds
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following table describes counter threshold table value for 15 minutes period.
Table 17-2
Threshold Table
Counters Default Threshold Values
3 - RS_15m
BBE
Value Up: 2400
Threshold Value Range

1 to 2,159,100
Value Down: 200

ES
Value Up: 50
1 to 900
Value Down: 5
SES
Value Up: 10
1 to 900
Value Down: 0
5 - 8B_10B_15m
BBE
Value Up: 11250
1 to 2,159,100
Value Down: 90
ES
Value Up: 50
1 to 900
Value Down: 5
SES
Value Up: 10
1 to 900
Value Down: 0
7 - 64B_66B_15m
BBE
Value Up: 426
1 to 2,159,100
Value Down: 3
ES
Value Up: 50
1 to 900
Value Down: 5
SES
Value Up: 10
1 to 900
Value Down: 0
9 - OCH_15m
BBU
Value Up: 1
1 to (231 - 1)
Value Down: 0
BEC
Value Up: 213
1 to 235,814,400
Value Down: 8
SUS
Value Up: 10
1 to 900
Value Down: 0
SCS
Value Up: 10
1 to 900
Value Down: 0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 17-2
(continued)
Threshold Table
11 - ODU_15m
BBE
Value Up: 738

1 to 44,481,600
Value Down: 6
SES
Value Up: 900
1 to 900
Value Down: 0
The following table describes counter threshold table value for 24 hours period.
Table 17-3
24 hours Counter Thresholds
Threshold Table
2 - RS_24h
BBE
36000
1 to 207,273,600
ES
150
1 to 86,400
SES
15
1 to 86,400
BBE
1,080,000
1 to 207,273,600
ES
150
1 to 86,400
SES
15
1 to 86,400
BBE
40,909
1 to 207,273,600
ES
150
1 to 86,400
SES
15
1 to 86,400
BBU
1 to (231 - 1)
BEC
218
1 to (231 - 1)
SUS
300
1 to 86,400
SCS
300
1 to 86,400
BBE
70870
1 to (231 - 1)
SES
1 to 86,400
4 - 8B_10B_24h
6 - 64B_66B_24h
8 - OCH_24h
11 - ODU_24h
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-10

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to manage counter
threshold tables.
Contents
17-12
17-13
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-11

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display counter threshold tables.

Before you begin
The 162- LM GUI is started.

How to display counter threshold tables
To display counter threshold tables, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Performance>Threshold Tables.

Result: The PM Threshold Table Select window is displayed and displays the list of
threshold tables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the list, select a table and click Display...

Result: The PM Threshold Table Display windows appears and displays the threshold
values and associated alarm severity.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-12

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to modify counter threshold tables.

Before you begin
ote: The following is not applicable for the current release:
Monitored Entity Types area of PM Threshold Table Modify window.
Create..., Attach and Delete buttons of PM Threshold Table Select window.
How to modify counter threshold tables
To modify counter threshold tables, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Performance>Threshold Tables menu.

Result: The PM Threshold Table Select window is displayed and displays the list of
threshold tables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the list, select a table and click Modify...

Result: The PM Threshold Table Modify windows appears and displays the threshold
values and associated alarm severity.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modify the relevant field for the required counter and click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-13

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to manage performance
monitoring.
Contents
17-15
17-17
17-18
17-19
17-20
17-21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-14

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to start performance monitoring.

Before you begin
You must comply if you comply with the following:

To start PM on
layers ...
Select board type ...
And check that ...
SDH/RS
TRBx
TM (Trail Monitor) on ODU1 or ODU2
block is created.
ETHC
RSTTP block is available.
2*GE_FC
TM on OCHgdc block is created.
ETHC
OCHgdc block is available.
Ethernet 10
Gbps
TRBD1191
TM on ODU2 block is created.
FEC/OCH
TRBx
OCH block is available.
Ethernet 1 Gbps
The Transmission View window of the required board is displayed.
The relevant transmission block is selected.
How to start performance monitoring
To start performance monitoring, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance > Configure
Performance Monitoring.
Result: The PM Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select NE15m or NE24h tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tick Create Current Data check box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you want to start performance monitoring without performance alarms, perform the
following, else go to step Step 5.
1. From the Threshold table list, select No table and click Apply.
2. Go to step Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-15

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you want to start performance monitoring with performance alarms, perform the
following:
1. From the Threshold table list, select Default table and click Attach.
2. Go to step Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, select the other tab and perform the procedure from step Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
About Performance Management (p. 17-3)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-16

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to reset counter values.

Good to know
UAS counter reset is not applicable.
Layer 2 counter reset is not applicable.
Before you begin
The monitored transmission block (P) is selected.
How to reset counter values
To reset counter values, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance>Display Current

Data....
Result: The PM Current Data window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Reset.
Result: The counter values are reset. They increment again until the end of the current
period.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-17

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to refresh counter values.

Before you begin
How to refresh counter values
To refresh counter values, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data....
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Refresh.
Result: The counter values are refreshed.
Wait at least 20 seconds between 2 refresh actions.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-18

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to stop performance monitoring.

Before you begin
How to stop performance monitoring
To stop performance monitoring, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance>Configure

Performance Monitoring.
Result: The PM Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select NE15m or NE24h tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Untick Create Current Data check box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Threshold table list, select No table and click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Consulting Performance Current Data (p. 17-25)
Consulting Performance History Data (p. 17-26)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-19

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to create a trail monitor.

Reminder
You can create a TM on transmission blocks ...
to start PM on layers
...
ODU1 and ODU2 (TRBx)
SDH/RS
ODU2 (TRBD1191)
Ethernet 10 Gbps
OCHgdc (2*GE_FC)
Ethernet 1 Gbps
OCH (TRBx)
FEC/OCH
Before you begin
The relevant transmission block is selected.
How to create a TM
To create a TM, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Trail Monitor > Create.
Result: The Transmission View window is updated and the TM representation is
displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Consulting Performance History Data (p. 17-26)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-20

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to delete a trail monitor

Before you begin
How to delete a TM
To delete a TM, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Trail Monitor > Delete.
Result: The Transmission View window is updated and the TM representation
disappears.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-21

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to consult performance
data.
Contents
17-23
17-24
17-25
17-26
17-27
17-28
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-22

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Each counter values saving period has a specific tab which title is:
Pm15minUnidirect: for 15 minutes counter values saving period,
Pm24hUnidirect: for 24 hours counter values saving period.
ote: For ETHC layer 2 counters, the counter value is saved since the ETHC board
provisioning and not for a 15 minutes or a 24 hours period.
The following table describes the displayed current data parameters.
Table 17-4
Current Data Parameters
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Administrative
State
Displays the administrative state of the PM

process.
Unlocked
The PM process is running normally.

Measurement points are collecting data.
Locked
The PM process is stopped.

Data collection is suspended
Operational State
Displays the operational state of the PM

process.
Enabled
PM process started. Measurement points

are initialized for data collection.
Disabled
PM process not started. Measurement

points are not initialized.
Suspect Data
Informs if the displayed counter values are

significant or not for a given period.
Yes
The counter value collection has been

stopped. The counter values are not
significant for the given period.
No
The counter value collection has ended

correctly for the given period. The counter
values are significant.
Threshold Table
Displays the name of the threshold table.
The name of the threshold table.
Current Problem
List
Lists the counters which threshold has

been reached or exceeded.
List of counters.
Elapsed Time
Displays the elapsed time from the

beginning of a given period of from a
reset.
HH:MM:SS.
Counter Values
Shows the counter values at the time of

display.
Counter values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-23

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also

Each counter values saving period has a specific tab which title is:
Pm15minUnidirect: for 15 minutes counter values saving period,
Pm24hUnidirect: for 24 hours counter values saving period.
ote: For ETHC layer 2 counters, the counter value is saved for a 15 minutes period
only.
The following table describes the displayed history data parameters.
Table 17-5
History Data Parameters
Parameters
Description
Possible Values
Interval End Time
Displays the end time of a given period.
DD.MM.YYYY HH:MM:SS
Counter values
Shows the counter values at the time of

display.
Counter values.
Elapsed Time
Displays the elapsed time from the

beginning of a given period of from a
reset.
HH:M:SEC.
Suspect Data
Informs if the displayed counter values are

significant or not for a given period.
Yes
The counter value collection has been

stopped. The counter values are not
significant for the given period.
No
The counter value collection has ended

correctly for the given period. The counter
values are significant.
See Also
Refreshing Current Counter Values (p. 17-27)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-24

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to consult performance current data

Before you begin
How to consult current performance data
To consult performance current data, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data....
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-25

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
use this procedure to consult performance history data.

Before you begin
How to consult performance history data
To consult performance history data, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance>Display History

Data....
Result: The PM History Data window is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-26

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to refresh current counter values.

Before you begin
How to refresh current counter values
To refresh current counter values, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data....
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Refresh.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-27

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to refresh history counter values.

Before you begin
How to refresh history counter values
To refresh history counter values, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data....
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Refresh.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-28
Managing Performance Monitoring From a Unique Entry

Point
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Managing Performance Monitoring From a Unique

Entry Point
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how you can manage Performance Monitoring from a unique entry
point thanks to the PM Overview window.
Contents
17-30
17-31
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-29

Point
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The PM Overview Window
The PM Overview window enables you to collect and display the required TP
(Termination Points) on which you want to perform one of the following:
To configure Performance Monitoring.
To display current or history data.
To cancel TP display.
To access to a selected TP transmission view.
Benefit of PM Overview window
From the PM Overview window, you can basically perform all the Performance
Monitoring procedures without having to access one by one, the transmission views of all
the related monitored entities.
ote: For information, the unitary Performance Monitoring procedures are accessible
at the following place:
Starting Performance Monitoring (PM) (p. 17-15)
Consulting Performance Data (p. 17-22)
PM Overview Searching Criteria
The following table describes the searching criteria you can use.
To be completed. Description of search criteria.
PM Overview Possible Tasks
To be completed. Description of each buttons.

See Also
Managing Performance Monitoring from the PM Overview Window (p. 17-31)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-30

Point
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing Performance Monitoring from the PM Overview
Window

Window
Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to manage Performance Monitoring from a unique
entry point rather that having to access one by one, the transmission views of all the
related monitored entities.
Before you begin
To be able to start PM
on layers ...
Check that ...
SDH/RS
TM (Trail Monitor) on ODU1 or ODU2 block is created.

RSTTP block is available.
Ethernet 1 Gbps
TM on OCHgdc block is created.

OCHgdc block is available.
Ethernet 10 Gbps
TM on ODU2 block is created.
FEC/OCH
OCH block is available.
To know how to create a Trail Monitor, refer to Creating a Trail Monitor (TM)
(p. 17-20)
How to manage performance Monitoring from the PM Overview window
To manage performance monitoring from the PM Overview window, perform the

following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Performance>PM Overview...

Result: The PM Overview window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, complete the search criteria.

To know details about search criteria, refer to PM Overview Searching Criteria
(p. 17-30)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the main displaying area, select the node an click Add TP...
Result: The TP Search for PM Overview window is displayed.
For any details about TP Search window, refer to Describing and Using the Search
for Termination Point Input Windows (p. 3-31)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-31

Point
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From Equipment area, select the relevant entry.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, from TP Search Criteria area, set the relevant search criteria.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Search.
Result: The system retrieves and displays the TP in Termination Points area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one, several or all TP and click OK.

Result:
The TP Search for PM Overview disappears.
The PM Overview window is displayed and displays the selected TPs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one TP and apply one of the following tasks:
Config PM... to configure and start Performance Monitoring on the select TP.
Current Data to display current performance data.
History Data to display performance history data.
Delete to delete the displayed TP from the main displaying area.
Delete all to delete all the displayed TP from the main displaying area.
Port View... to display the transmission view of the selected TP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary repeat action Step 8 as many times you need to configure/reconfigure or to

display Performance Monitoring on selected TPs.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
The PM Overview Window (p. 17-30)
Starting Performance Monitoring (PM) (p. 17-15)
Consulting Performance Data (p. 17-22)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
17-32
18
18
System
Information
Collection and
Exportation
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedures to follow when you want to collect or export
system information.
Contents
18-2
Uploading the System Remote Inventory
18-3
Capturing the System Components Remote Inventory Information
18-4
18-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
18-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following table describes the remote inventory displayed information.
Table 18-1
Parameters
Description
Company
Displays the manufacturer of the unit
Unit Type
Displays the unit acronym
Unit Part Number
Displays the manufacturer product part number. This number is printed on

labels or on unit front coverplate.
Software part Number
Displays the related software identifier
CLEI Code
Displays the Common Language Equipment Identification code according to

Bellcore specification (TRS-ISD-325).
Manufacturing Plant
Displays the manufacturing site
Serial Number
Displays the product serial number. Compliant with R 130 standard.
Date Identifier
Displays a sequence of 2 digits identifiers which indicate a specific date in the

manufacturing and order flow process. It is associated with a date.
00: Manufacturing at the final testing date
01: Production order date
02: Manufacturing date at the unit lot
03: Shipment date to customer
04: Customer order date
Date (YYMMDD)
Displays the date related to the Date identifier.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
18-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
use this procedure to upload the system remote inventory.

Before you begin

How to upload the system remote inventory
To upload the system remote inventory, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Supervision>Upload Remote Inventory.

Result: The Question dialog box appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The upload starts.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait until the Remote inventory upload Completed message is displayed and
click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note
The system remote inventory data are stored on the Craft Terminal PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
18-3
Capturing the System Components Remote Inventory

Information
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Information
Purpose
Use this procedure to capture the system components remote inventory information.
Before you begin
The Equipment view window is displayed.

How to capture the system components remote inventory information
To capture system components remote inventory information, perform the following

steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Equipment>Remote Inventory.
To capture rack or subrack level remote inventory information, go to Step 2.
To capture board level remote inventory information, go to Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To capture rack and subrack level remote inventory information, perform the following
sequence:
1. Click on the required rack.
2. Select Equipment>Remote Inventory.
3. Click Rack Level or subrack Level.
The Confirmation dialog box appears.
4. Click OK to validate your choice.
The upload starts.
5. From the display window, you can print or save the rack or subrack remote inventory
data.
There is no error message to indicate that there is no printer connected to the Craft
terminal PC.
6. End of rack or subrack remote inventory information capture. Go to End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To capture board level remote inventory information, perform the following sequence:
1. Click on a board.
2. Select Equipment>Remote Inventory.
3. Select Board Level.
The Confirmation dialog box appears.
4. Click OK to validate your choice.
The upload starts.
The board remote inventory data are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
18-4

Information
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
18-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to export system configuration information to an xml
file.
Before you begin
The configuration of the node is complete.

How to export the system configuration to an xml file
To export the system configuration to an xml file, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Export Configuration menu.

Result: The Export Configuration window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From theExport Configuration window, you can check one or several check boxes
corresponding to the type of information you want to export.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Browse to select the location where you want to save the xml file.
Result: The Export to XML file window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select a drive and enter a file name into Choise.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: Export starts. When finished, Information box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The Information box disappears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
18-6
19
Alarm Management
19
Overview
Purpose
This chapter:
gives an overview on the 1626 LM alarm organization,
describes the parameters and procedures to follow to manage the alarm severity
profiles,
describes the parameters and procedures to follow to manage the alarm threshold
tables.
Contents
About Alarms
19-3
Alarm Types
19-4
19-5
19-7
19-8
19-10
19-11
Creating an ASAP
19-12
Modifying an ASAP
19-14
19-16
19-18
19-20
Deleting ASAPs
19-22
19-23
19-24
19-27
19-28
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-1
Alarm Management
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Assigning an Alarm Threshold to a Board
19-30
19-31
19-33
19-34
Enabling/Disabling Auto Discovery Alarm
19-35
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-2
Alarm Management
About Alarms
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About Alarms
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the 1626 LM alarm system.

Contents
Alarm Types
19-4
19-5
19-7
19-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-3
Alarm Management
About Alarms
Alarm Types
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Types
The 1626 LM supports the following alarm types:
Equipment alarms
Transmission alarms
Housekeeping alarm
Processing alarm
Auto Discovery alarm
Equipment Alarms
These alarms report faults that are raised by a specific 1626 LM hardware component.
Equipment alarms warn of:
1626 LM internal fiber cable connection problem
1626 LM internal fiber break
1626 LM board failure
Transmission Alarms
These alarms report communication faults between a 1626 LM and remote network
equipment.
Transmission alarms warn of:
Fiber cable break
Line problems within the network
Bad transmission quality
Problems on remote network equipment
Housekeeping Alarm
There is one alarm only, which relates to the environmental issues. This alarm is raised
after external output points configuration.
Processing Alarm
This alarm relates to configuration data corruption. This alarm is raised when the database
integrity test reports a failure.
Auto Discovery Alarm
This alarm relates to the ability of the 1626 LM to report to the network manager that:
a new 1626 LM has been introduced in the network, or
existing 1626 LM communication addresses have been modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-4
Alarm Management
About Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The 1626 LM tracks and reports faults. If a fault occurs, an alarm is generated.
You can identify very quickly if alarms have been reported with the alarm severity
indicators located at the top left of the GUI.
According to the severity level, Alarm indicators display different shapes and colors:
When there are no raised alarms, indicators are just rectangles, without any numbers as
illustrated the following figure.
Figure 19-1 Alarm Severity Indicators / No Raised Alarms
When there are raised alarms, indicators display a circle with a figure for the number of
alarms corresponding to the severity level. The following figure gives an example of
alarm indicators displaying raised alarms.
Figure 19-2 Alarm Severity Indicators / Raised Alarms
Alarm severity levels are defined as mentioned in the following table.

Table 19-1
Alarm Severity Levels
Severity
Levels
Colors
Description
CRITICAL (CRI)
Red
A service-affecting condition has occurred and immediate

corrective action is required.
MAJOR (MAJ)
Orange
A service-affecting condition has developed and urgent corrective

action is required.
MINOR (MIN)
Yellow
A non-service-affecting fault condition has occurred, and you need

to take corrective action to prevent a more serious fault (for
example, one affecting the service).
WARNING (WNG)
Cyan
Detection of a potential or impending service-affecting fault,

before any significant effects have been felt.
INDETERMINATE
(IND)
White
The severity level cannot be determined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-5
Alarm Management
About Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ote: The five alarm severity indicators are greyed-out when the alarm notification
has been inhibited. The indicators keep the information they had just before the inhibit
action.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-6
Alarm Management
About Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

To spot very quickly the operation domains which are impacted by alarms, you can use
the operation domain alarm indicators located at the top right of the GUI. With these
indicators, you know if alarms are related to:
External Points
Equipments
Transmissions
According to the severity level, alarms domain indicators display different shapes and
colors:
When there are no raised alarms, indicators are just rectangles, without any numbers.
When there are raised alarms, indicators display a circle with a figure for the number
of alarms corresponding to the operation domain. The following figure gives an
example of operation domain alarm indicators displaying raised and no raised alarms.
Figure 19-3 Operation Domain Alarm Indicators
The severity level conventions are the same as for alarm severity indicators.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-7
Alarm Management
About Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Each managed entity is assigned with a default alarm severity level via a profile which is
called ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profile).
An ASAP maps an alarm to a severity level for:
service-affecting context (SA)
non-service-affecting context (NSA).
The system determines automatically SA or NSA context depending on the implication of

the managed entity in the transmission process. If the managed entity participates in the
transmission process, it will be considered as part of a service-affecting context (SA).
By default the 1626 LM is delivered with 4 system ASAP which can not be updated.
The 4 system ASAP are described in the following table.
Table 19-2
System ASAP
ASAP
Description
PRIMARY_ALARMS
The ASAP which defines the SA and SA severity levels for:
transmission alarms (excepted for AIS and SSF alarms),
equipment alarms.
This is the ASAP which is basically assigned to almost all

managed entities.
ALL_ALARMS
PATH_ALARMS
all transmission alarms,
all equipment alarms
transmission alarms (excepted for AIS alarm),
equipment alarms.
When the Remote Manager takes control of 1626 LM, all

managed entities are assigned with ALL_ALARMS ASP.
NO_ALARMS
The ASAP which inhibits all alarms.

This ASAP is very useful at 1626 LM installation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-8
Alarm Management
About Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System ASAP
To be able to create a specific ASAP and to assign it to a managed entity, you must:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the default ASAP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Clone the selected ASAP and save it with a specific name.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Assign the relevant SA and SA severity levels for each required alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Assign the ASAP to the adequate managed entities.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
End.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-9
Alarm Management

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment

Profiles)
Overview
Purpose
This topic describes the parameters and procedure to perform when you want to manage
alarm severity assignment profiles.
Contents
19-11
Creating an ASAP
19-12
Modifying an ASAP
19-14
19-16
19-18
19-20
Deleting ASAPs
19-22
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-10
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display ASAP detailed information.

Before you begin

How to display ASAP detailed information
To display ASAP detailed information, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Alarm Severities

Result: The ASAPs management window is displayed and lists the existing ASAP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the list, select one ASAP and click Detail.

Result: The ASAP Edition window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Probable Causes Families area, check one or several alarm families.
Result: Alarms are displayed in the Probable Cause Names list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the list, select an alarm.

Result: Severity levels of Service Affecting alarms and on Service Affecting alarms
are displayed. Service Independent value must be Not Used.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, repeat step Step 4 to display other alarm severity levels.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Cancel.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-11
Alarm Management

Creating an ASAP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating an ASAP
Purpose
Use this procedure to create an ASAP.

Before you begin
The 1626 LM GUI is displayed.

How to create an ASP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the list, select a default ASAP and click Clone.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In ASAP Identifier field, enter a name for the new ASAP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Probable Causes Families area, check one or several alarm families to include
in the new ASAP.
Result: Alarms are displayed in the Probable Cause ames list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: Current severity levels of Service Affecting alarms and on Service Affecting
alarms are displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In Service Affecting list, click on the required severity level.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In Non Service Affecting list, click on the required severity level.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat from Step 5 until all alarm severity levels are assigned.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-12
Alarm Management

Creating an ASAP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The new ASAP is displayed in ASAPs management window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Click Close.
EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-13
Alarm Management

Modifying an ASAP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modifying an ASAP
Purpose
Use this procedure to modify an ASAP

Before you begin
The ASAP to modify is not a default ASAP.
How to modify an ASAP
To modify an ASAP, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the list, select an ASAP and click Modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Probable Causes Families area, check one or several alarm families.
Result: Alarms are displayed in the Probable Cause ames list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: Current severity levels of Service Affecting alarms and on Service Affecting
alarms are displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In Service Affecting list, click on the required severity level.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In Non Service Affecting list, click on the required severity level.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat from step Step 5 until all alarm severity levels are modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The modified ASAP is displayed in ASAPs management window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-14
Alarm Management

Modifying an ASAP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Click Close.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-15
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to assign an ASAP to a managed entity.

Before you begin
A managed entity is selected.
How to assign an ASAP to a managed entity
To assign an ASAP to a managed entity, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration > Set Alarms Severities...

Result: The Set ASAP window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the List of ASAPs area, select the required ASAP. Otherwise go to step Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To assign the selected ASAP to a selected managed entity, perform the following.
Otherwise go to step Step 4.
1. In the Apply To area, check that Selected object only radio button is selected.
2. Click OK to finish. Go to End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To assign the selected ASAP to a selected managed entity and its subordinates, perform
the following. Otherwise go to step Step 6.
1. In the Apply To area, check that Selected object and subordinates radio button is
selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK to finish. Go to step End.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To assign the selected ASAP to all managed entities of the 1626 LM, perform the
following. Otherwise go to step Step 7.
1. Select Network element radio button.
2. Select All classes radio button.
3. Click OK to finish. Go to End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-16
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To assign the selected ASAP to specific types of managed entities, perform the following.
1. Select Network element radio button.
2. Select Specific classes radio button.
3. In the activated list, select one of several classes with Up or Down arrow keys
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities (p. 19-18)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-17
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity (p. 19-16) explains how to assign an ASAP
once a specific TP or equipment has been previously selected. In this context, it means
that you must access and select each TP or equipment prior to execute the referenced
procedure. This can be very painful when your configuration involves a lot of boards.
The way to assign an ASAP to multiple managed entities is described in the following
procedure.
ote: To make the procedure easier to read, only TP selection will be described.
Before you begin

How to assign an ASAP to multiple managed entities
To assign an ASAP to multiple managed entities, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Set Alarm>Severities...

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From List of ASAPs area, select the ASAP to assign.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click TP List...
Result: The Clipboard - Set ASAP window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From Add Object area, click Add TP...

Result: The TP Search / Clipboard - Set ASAP window is displayed.
For any details about TP Search / Clipboard - Set ASAP window window, refer to
Describing and Using the Search for Termination Point Input Windows (p. 3-31)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Equipment area, select the relevant entity to search for TPs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Search.
Result: The related TPs are displayed in Termination Points area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one, several or all TPs and click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-18
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Once the selected TPs have been taken into account, the TP Search / Clipboard Set ASAP window disapears.
The selected TPs are displayed in Clipboard - Set ASAP window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Start.
Result: The selected TPs are progressively flagged Pending, then OK. The selected
ASAP is then assigned to the selected TPs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-19
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to de-assign an ASAP from a set of managed entities.
De-assigning an ASAP comes to replace the current ASAP by another one. Once the
ASAP is de-assigned, it is considered as not being in use, and can be deleted.
Before you begin

How to de-assign an ASAP from managed entities
To de-assign an ASAP from managed entities, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Set Alarm>Severities...

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From List of ASAPs area, select a new ASAP to assign in place of the current one.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click TP List...
Result: The Clipboard - Set ASAP window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From Add Object area, click Add TP...

Result: The TP Search / Clipboard - Set ASAP window is displayed.
For any details about TP Search / Clipboard - Set ASAP window window, refer to
Describing and Using the Search for Termination Point Input Windows (p. 3-31)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Equipment area, select the relevant entity to search for TPs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the ASAP Search area, select the ASAP value that is currently assigned.
This filter will retrieve the TPs which are assigned with the current ASAP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Search.
Result: The related TPs are displayed in Termination Points area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the TPs, and click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-20
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Once the selected TPs have been taken into account, the TP Search / Clipboard Set ASAP window disapears.
The selected TPs are displayed in Clipboard - Set ASAP window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Start.
Result: The selected TPs are progressively flagged Pending, then OK. The new
selected ASAP is then assigned to the selected TPs and replaces the current one.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Deleting ASAPs (p. 19-22)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-21
Alarm Management

Deleting ASAPs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deleting ASAPs
Purpose
Use this procedure to delete ASAPs

Before you begin
The ASAP to delete is not a default ASAP.
The ASAP to delete is not in use.

Refer to De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities (p. 19-20)
How to delete ASAPs
To delete ASAPs, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the list, select one ASAP and click Delete.

Result: The ASAP disappears from the list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-22
Alarm Management

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
An alarm threshold defines the triggering point of the following alarms:
LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section)
Alarm threshold configuration apply for the following boards:
BMDX
CMDX
OMDX
LOFA
WMA
TDMX
TRBD and TRBC
Each of theses boards are assigned with a default threshold table which holds the alarm
threshold values.
To be able to create a specific threshold table and to assign it to a board, you must:
1. Select one of the default threshold table.
2. Clone the selected table and save it with a specific name.
3. Assign the threshold table to the required board.
4. End.
You can create until 14 alarm threshold tables for the 1626 LM node.
This topic describes the parameters and procedures to follow when you want to manage
alarm threshold tables.
Contents
19-24
19-27
19-28
19-30
19-31
19-33
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-23
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following tables give the alarm threshold values for the following boards:
BMDX
CMDX
OMDX
LOFA
WMA3174
WMA1100
TDMX
TRBD and TRBC
Table 19-3
BMDX Alarm Thresholds
BMDX
Alarm Threshold - Port
Default Value
Range
Step
IPL/LOMS at Demux input port
-2 dBm
-2 dBm to +24
dBm
1 dB
IPL at Mux input ports (1 -> 12)
-32 dBm
-32 dBm to +19

dBm
1 dB
CMDX
Default Value
Range
Step
IPL/LOMS at Demux input port
-20 dBm
-35 dBm to +15

dBm
1 dB
-30 dBm
-30 dBm to +15

dBm
1 dB
Default Value
Range
Step
-38 dBm
-40 dBm to +23

dBm
1 dB
Table 19-4
Table 19-5
CMDX Alarm Thresholds
OMDX Alarm Thresholds
OMDX
IPL/LOMS at ODX line input port
IPL at OMX extra port
IPL at OMX expansion port (for L1X

model only)
OPL at OMX line output port
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-24
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 19-6
LOFA Alarm Thresholds
LOFA
Default Value
Range
Step
IPL/LOMS at first stage input (for

LOFA11x0)
-35 dBm
-40 dBm to +5
dBm
1 dB
IPL/LOMS at first stage input (for

LOFA11x1)
-38 dBm
-38 dBm to +5
dBm
1 dB
Table 19-7
WMAN3174 Alarm Thresholds
WMAN3174
Default Value
Range
Step
IPL at wavelength manager input (Add &

Drop and Express)
-30 dBm
-30 dBm to +14

dBm
1 dB
IPL at wavelength selective switch input
-30 dBm
-30 dBm to +14

dBm
1 dB
OPL at line output
-30 dBm
-30 dBm to +14

dBm
1 dB
Table 19-8
WMAN1100 Alarm Thresholds
WMAN1100
Default Value
Range
Step
IPL at line input
-6 dBm
-10 dBm to +20

dBm
1 dB
OPL at wavelength blocker output
-12 dBm
-24 dBm to +9
dBm
1 dB
OPL at line output
-14 dBm
-25 dBm to +7
dBm
1 dB
TDMX
Default Value
Range
Step
IPL at line input
-24 dBm
-30 dBm to +14

dBm
1 dB
OPL at channel output
-24 dBm
-30 dBm to +14

dBm
1 dB
Table 19-9
TDMX Alarm Thresholds
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-25
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 19-10
TRBD and TRBC Alarm Threshold
TRBD and TRBC

Alarm Threshold
Default Value
Range
FEC Module Uncorrected Errors (High

Threshold) (In Blocks)
10,499,451
1 to 10,499,451
Step
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-26
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to display board alarm thresholds.

Before you begin
The required board view is displayed.

How to display board alarm threshold
To display board alarm thresholds, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Board>Alarm Threshold Configuration

Result: The Alarm Threshold Configuration window is displayed and lists the
existing alarm threshold tables for the selected board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Threshold table list, select an entry and click View.
Result: The Alarm Threshold view window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Cancel to close the window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
See Also
Alarm Threshold Parameters (p. 19-24)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-27
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to create alarm threshold tables.

Before you begin

How to create alarm threshold tables
To create alarm threshold tables, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

existing alarm threshold tables.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Threshold table list, select an entry and click Clone.
Result: The Alarm threshold table cloning window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In Table name field, enter a name for the new alarm threshold table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each of the thresholds, select the required value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Clone.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The new alarm threshold table appears in the Threshold Table list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the list, select the new table.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The new table is assigned to the selected board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-28
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-29
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to assign an alarm threshold to a board.

Before you begin

How to assign an alarm threshold to a board
To assign an alarm threshold to a board, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Threshold table list, select an entry and click Apply.
Result: The selected table is assigned to the selected board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-30
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to modify alarm threshold tables,

Before you begin

How to modify alarm threshold tables
To modify alarm threshold tables, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Threshold table list, select an entry and click Modify.
Result: The Alarm threshold table modification window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, in Table name field, enter a new for the threshold table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For the required thresholds, select a new value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: The new alarm threshold table appears in the Threshold Table list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the list, select the new table.

Result: Click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The modified table is assigned to the selected board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-31
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Also
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-32
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to delete alarm threshold tables.

Before you begin
The alarm threshold table to delete is not a default one.
The alarm threshold table to delete is not the current assigned table.
How to delete alarm threshold tables
To delete alarm threshold tables, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Threshold table list, select an entry and click Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Delete to confirm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EN
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-33
Alarm Management

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manage the ability to report to the network manager that:
Contents
19-35
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-34
Alarm Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure when you want to enable/disable the 1626 LM to report to the network
manager that:
Before you begin

How to enable/disable Auto Discovery alarm
To enable/disable Auto Discovery alarm, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Configuration>Management>Auto Discovery.

Result: Network Element - Auto Discovery window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the drop-down list, select one of the following:
Enable: to enable the network manager to be warned of 1626 LM introduction or
network addresses modifications.
EN
Disable: to disable the auto discovery alarm to be reported to the network manager.
D
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
19-35
20
Equipment Alarms
20
Overview
Purpose
This topic gives a description of the alarms raised from the hardware components and the
required actions to perform to clear the raised alarms.
Contents
20-3
20-4
20-5
HT (High Temperature)
20-6
20-7
20-8
20-9
LA (LA Alarm)
20-10
20-11
OPD (Output Power Degraded)
20-12
20-13
PD (Performance Degraded)
20-14
PP (Power Problem)
20-15
20-16
20-17
20-18
20-19
20-20
TD (Transmitter Degraded)
20-21
TF (Transmitter Failure)
20-22
20-23
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-1
Equipment Alarms
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-24
20-25
VM (Version Mismatch)
20-26
20-27
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-2
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
The WMA optical channel monitor does not work

properly.
Probable Cause
The channel supervision is not accurate at board level.
Related Alarms
one.
Corrective Actions
On-Site Intervention Required
Yes, when appropriate regarding operations.
Actions
Replace the board after route reconfiguration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-3
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
ALCT or LOFA cases

Indicates that ALCT or LOFA boards are working
out of acceptable range of value regarding laser
output power and optical attenuation.
TR-OADM configuration case

Indicates that transponder laser state is not
compatible with channel state.
COCE is an indication to inform that these devices are

currently not used as they have been designed for typical
use.
COCE does not necessarily imply any malfunction or
failure.
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
COCE alarm may be raised:
following particular tuning due to specific

configuration,
in a TR-OADM configuration, when a transponder

laser is on and the channel state is Express.
one.
Corrective Actions
Yes
Actions
1. Escalate the problem to your performance

optimization support team to determine if a
corrective action must be done.
2. To clear the alarm, increase or decrease the values of
output power and optical attenuation accordingly.
3. If the problem persists, contact Alcatel-Lucent
Support Team.
4. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-4
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
WMA failure for a specific channel.
Probable Cause
Hardware failure of one component of the WMA

board.
Related Alarms

Corrective Actions
Actions
Replace the board after route reconfiguration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-5
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
Board temperature is greater than 50C.
Room air conditioning system does not work

properly.
At least one of the 3 related fans has failed.
one.
Corrective Actions
Yes
Actions
1. Verify if the room air conditioning system works

properly.
2. If necessary and according to your procedures, clean
or replace the dust filter.
3. If necessary, replace the faulty fans.
4. If necessary, replace the board.
5. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-6
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
A temperature problem has occurred on a LOFA or a fan

board.
The gain block of a LOFA board recently plugged

has not reached the correct temperature.
The fan dust filters are dirty.
one.
Corrective Actions
Yes
Actions
For LOFA board:
1. If the board has been plugged recently, wait until the

gain block is fully operational.
2. If the board has been plugged for a certain time,
verify:
if the room air conditioning system works
properly.
if the dust filters are clean.
3. If necessary, replace the LOFA board.
4. End.
For fan board:
1. Verify:
2. if the room air conditioning system works properly.
if the dust filters are clean.
If necessary, replace the fan board.
3. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-7
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
Depending on the board which has raised the alarm.
A transponder has detected a degraded incoming

signal from a client transmitter.
A LOFA has detected a degraded incoming signal at

stage input.
A problem occurred on the client transmitter or

along the fiber path between the client node and the
1626 LM.
The input power at LOFA stage input is lower than

the minimum acceptable value for the given
configuration.
one.
Corrective Actions
Depending on the fault location.
Actions
For transponders:
1. Contact the relevant operation team to check the

client transmitter.
2. Check the client fiber connection at the transponder.
3. Check the fiber path between the client node and the
1626 LM.
4. End.
For LOFA:
1. Check the mechanical aspect of the fiber

(Connection at stage input and fiber aspect)
2. If the alarm persists, tune the amplification level.
This operation may require Alcatel-Lucent Technical
Support intervention.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-8
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
Optical power loss at input port.

For TRBx boards: can be raised at VOA input, excepted
for TRBD1191 MLSE.

For WMAN boards: can be raised for a single express
channel.
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
The fiber may be unplugged
The fiber between the impacted board and the

previous transmission device may be broken.
The transmitter of the previous transmission device

may be in failure.
The VOA does not detect any input signal.
One express channel is not in service in the network.

Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. Check the fiber connection.

2. Check the fiber path from the previous transmission
device.
3. Check the transmitter of the previous transmission
device.
4. If applicable, verify the connection between:
the TRBx output and the VOA input
the BOFA output and the VOA input
5. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-9
Equipment Alarms
LAN (LAN Alarm)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LAN (LAN Alarm)

LAN (Local Area Network Alarm)
Description
The LA link between the 1626 LM and its network

manager is lost.
Probable Cause
The relevant cable is disconnected or broken.
Related Alarms
one.
Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. In the master subrack, on the ESCT-EC board, check

the cable which supports the management traffic.
2. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-10
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
The front cover has been removed.

For safety reason, the laser of the following boards is
automatically shutdown:
for EMPM boards, the laser is shutdown
immediately.
For LOFA boards:
the laser is shutdown immediately if the cover

disable status is Cover_Enable.
the laser is shutdown after a 5 minutes timer if
the cover disable status is Cover_Disable.
Probable Cause
The front panel safety cover has been removed.
Related Alarms
URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable) at LOFA

shutdown.
Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. Replace the front panel safety cover to restart the

LOFA board.
2. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-11
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
The output power of TRBD, WMA or ALCT boards is

not the configured one.
Probable Cause
The requested power or attenuation settings cannot

apply because out of acceptable range.
Related Alarms
Related equipment alarm(s) may be raised if hardware

problem.
Corrective Actions
Depending on the context.
Actions
Perform one of the following actions:
Check board configuration to determine if the

power or attenuation setting is compliant with board
acceptable range.
Check if other equipment alarms have raised to

determine if the problem is related to an hardware
failure. In this case, replace the equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-12
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
Optical power at output port is less than the minimum

value.
Probable Cause
If the board is a/an

...
OMDX-MUX,
CMDX 1052,
WMA, TDMX,
OADC, OCC
LOFA
OSCU
Related Alarms
Then ...
The optical output power is

less than the configured
threshold value.
The equipment may have an

hardware failure.
The first or second stage

optical output power is less
than the configured
threshold value.
The equipment may have an

hardware failure.
The laser may be out of service.
Related equipment alarm(s) may be raised if hardware

problem.
Corrective Actions
Depending on board type.
Actions
If the board is a/an

...
Then ...
OMDX-MUX,
CMDX 1052,
WMA, TDMX,
OADC, OCC
1. Adjust the threshold values

2. If the alarm persists, check
the complete upstream path.
3. If related equipment alarms,
replace the equipment.
4. End.
LOFA
1. Depending on the amplifier

stage, check first or second
stage APSD status.
2. End.
OSCU
1. Replace the board.

2. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-13
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
General case
Board initialization is in progress. During this phase,
the board is not fully operational.
WMA and TDMX case

WMA and TDMX boards cannot work properly
with the correct required output power value.
General case
Board initialization.
WMA and TDMX case

probable cause may be one of the following:
Incompatibility between channel power at board
input and required output set point value.
Wrong setup of board.
one.
Corrective Actions

Actions
o.
General case
Wait until the end of initialization and check that the
alarm is cleared
WMA and TDMX case

Check input power if applicable.
Check if specific configuration parameters are
compliant with commissioning rules.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-14
Equipment Alarms
PP (Power Problem)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PP (Power Problem)
PP (Power Problem)
Description
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
Power supply unit is not provided with the right voltage.
The public power supply network has a problem.
The connection is faulty.
one.
Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. Contact the public power supplier to check if there is

any problem in delivering the voltage.
2. Check the connection between the power supply unit
and the power supplier.
3. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-15
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
A declared equipment other than ESCT is missing in a

slot.
Probable Cause
See Description.
Related Alarms

Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. Plug the relevant board in the empty slot.

2. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-16
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
An hardware component has failed. This may be impact

the traffic.
Does not apply to SFP/XFP modules, nor to ESCT
boards.
Probable Cause
Hardware failure.
Related Alarms

Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions

2. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-17
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
An equipment which is plugged into the slot has a type

which is different from the declaration.
Probable Cause
Mismatch between board declaration and board

plugging.
Related Alarms

Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. If the declaration corresponds to your configuration,

change the equipment.
2. If the equipment type corresponds to your
configuration, modify the declaration.
3. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-18
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
Warning which indicates that the equipment which is

plugged into a slot is not an Alcatel part.
Probable Cause
See Description.
Related Alarms
one.
Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. Plug the Alcatel-Lucent equipment which is

validated for this purpose. Use of any other
equipment is not certified.
2. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-19
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
The master shelf, managed by the ESCT-SC, cannot

communicate with secondary shelf, managed by
ESCT-EC.
The ESCT-SC cannot manage the related subrack.
The ESCT-SC cannot report management

information to ESCT-EC.
one.
Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. Check the connection between master shelf and

secondary shelf.
2. Unplug the ESCT-SC and plug it again to restart the
board.
3. Check that SC LED of ESCT-SC is green.
Support team.
5. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-20
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Probable Cause
The transmitter module is degraded.
In case of board plugging
The board initialization is not complete. The alarm

should disappear once the initialization is finished.
In case of normal operation
The transmitter module of the board is degraded.

Related Alarms
one.
Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
In case of board plugging context:
1. Wait until the end of board initialization.

2. Unplug and replug the board to re-initialize it.
3. If necessary replace the board.
4. End.
In case of normal operation:

2. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-21
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
For transponders, SFP/XFP modules or ALCT boards:
the transmitter module has failed.

For amplifiers: The pump module is degraded.
Probable Cause
See Description.
Related Alarms
one.
Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions

2. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-22
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
Indicates that WMA initialization is on-going and

warm-up is on progress. In normal circumstances,
TOOR alarm is cleared automatically, and you just have
to wait. However, if TOOR alarm persists, WMA
board may be faulty and RUP alarm is raised.
Probable Cause
WMA3x board initialization requires a certain amount

of time to be at the right operational temperature.
Related Alarms
RUP (Replaceable Unit problem) if TOOR alarm is

raised for more than 40'.
Corrective Actions
Yes, if RUP alarm is raised.
Actions
Refer to RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem) (p. 20-17)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-23
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
An equipment is plugged into a slot without any

declaration.
Probable Cause
See Description.
Related Alarms
one.
Corrective Actions
o.
Actions
Perform the relevant declaration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-24
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
A transponder has detected a loss of signal from UDC

port.
Probable Cause
There is no equipment connected to UDC port.
Related Alarms
one.
Corrective Actions
Yes, if UDC port is used
Actions
If UDC port is not used:
1. Filter the alarm to clear it automatically.

2. End.
If UDC port is used:
1. Check the equipment connection to the port.

2. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-25
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
A wrong software version has been downloaded to the

ESCT-SC board.
Probable Cause
See Description.
Related Alarms
one.
Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. Unplug the ESCT-SC and plug it again to

re-initialize the board.
2. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-26
Equipment Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
The wavelength is out of range.
In case of board plugging:

The board initialization is not complete. The alarm
should disappear when initialization is complete.
In case of normal operations:

The optical module is failed and cannot align the
wavelength with the configured value.
URU (underlying Resource Unavailable)

Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. Check the board.

2. If necessary, replace the board.
3. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
20-27
21
Transmission Alarms
21
Overview
Purpose
This topic gives a description of the alarms raised during the transmission process and the
required actions to perform to clear the raised alarms.
Contents
21-2
21-3
21-4
LOF (Loss Of Frame)
21-5
21-6
21-7
21-8
LOSC (Loss Of Supervisory Channel)
21-9
LOSCF (Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame)
21-10
21-11
LTCER (Low Threshold Corrected Error)
21-12
otnTIM (Optical Transport etwork Trace Identifier Mismatch)
21-13
21-14
21-16
SSF- e (Server Signal Failure - egress)
21-17
TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm)
21-18
21-19
21-20
21-21
21-22
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-1
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
A remote network equipment delivers a fault indication

which is raised as an AIS.
The AIS may be raised by:
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
Rs-TM, ODU and OTU blocks of TRBC or TRBD

boards or
RSgdc block of ETHC and 2xGBE_FC boards.
If AIS is raised by:
Rs-TM block: the problem is related to the SDH

network.
ODU and OTU blocks: the problem is related to the

WDM network.
RSgdc block: the problem is related to the Ethernet

network.
SSF (Server Signal Failure) generated on higher

impacted layers.
Corrective Actions
Yes, on the equipment which has inserted the AIS.
Actions
1. Check the cabling and the path of the equipment

which has inserted the AIS.
2. Check the alarms of the equipment which has
inserted the AIS.
3. Repair or replace the faulty components.
4. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-2
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
LAPD transport problem through supervision frame.

Depending on the configuration, the supervision may be
not possible via the fiber.
CSF alarm is raised by OTS blocks.
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
LAPD configuration problem.
The corresponding end-point equipment may have

failed
Fiber problem.
one.
Corrective Actions
Yes
Actions
1. Check LAPD configuration consistency on both

point-to-point network equipments.
If network equipments are not reachable, you may
have to go on-site to perform the maintenance
actions.
2. Check the corresponding end-point equipment.
3. Check the fiber between the 2 end-point
equipments.
4. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-3
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
The SDH or Ethernet signal is degraded.

10-6 LBER threshold is reached or exceeded.
LBER alarm may be raised by:
Rs-TM block of TRBC or TRBD boards or
RsTTP block from ETHC and 2xGBE_FC boards.
Probable Cause
A transmission device or a fiber of the SDH or Ethernet

path transmits a bad quality signal. The source of the
problem may be remote.
Related Alarms
May be correlated with LTCER (Low Threshold

Corrected Error rate) alarm.
Corrective Actions
Yes
Actions
1. Check the previous transmission devices (client or

WDM) until you find the source of the alarm.
3. Check the transmitter of the transmission device
which is the source of the alarm.
4. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-4
Transmission Alarms
LOF (Loss Of Frame)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOF (Loss Of Frame)

LOF (Loss Of Frame)
Description
The optical signal is received with a non conform

contents. The frame cannot be decoded.
LOF alarm may be raised by:
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
OCHA, and ODU blocks of TRBC or TRBD boards

or
OCH block of ETHC or 2xGE_FC boards.
The line may have failed on a remote network

equipment.
A remote network equipment may be faulty.

impacted layers.
Corrective Actions
Depending on the fault location.
Actions
1. Check the optical line and verify if there is not any

fiber break.
2. Check if the current 1626 LM and the remote
network equipment are configured for the same type
of communication.
3. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-5
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
The optical signal is received with a non conform

contents. The OTU multi-frame cannot be decoded.
LOMF alarm is raised by OCHA block of TRBC or
TRBD boards.
Probable Cause
A remote network equipment may be faulty.
Related Alarms

impacted layers.
Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. Verify if the current 1626 LM and the remote

network equipment are configured for the same type
of communication.
2. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-6
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
Indicates that the payload signal is lost whereas the

supervision signal is received.
LOMS alarm is raised by:
OTS block of LOFA boards for incoming WDM

signal,
OTS block from CMDX or BMDX boards for

incoming band signal.
Probable Cause
Transmitter of previous transmission device may be in

failure.
Related Alarms

impacted layers.
Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. Check if the transmitter of the previous transmission

device has failed.
2. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-7
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
For transponders, Mux/Demux, Ethernet boards: the

incoming signal is absent or misinterpreted.
For amplifiers: both payload and supervision signals are
lost.
LOS alarm may be raised by:
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
OGPI block of TRBC, TRBD, CMDX, ETHC or

2xGBE_FC boards.
OGPI block from OCPU board.
OTS block of a LOFA board.
The fiber may be unplugged,
The fiber between the impacted board and the

previous transmission device may be broken,

may be in failure.

impacted layers.
IPL (Input Power Loss).
Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions

2. Check the fiber between the impacted board and the
previous transmission device.
3. Check the transmitter of the previous transmission
device.
4. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-8
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
Indicates that the OSCU board does not receive any

supervision signal.
LOSC alarm is raised by OTS block related to the
LOFA board associated with the OSCU board.
Probable Cause
A problem occurred between the impacted board and the

previous amplifier.
Related Alarms
one.
Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. Check the OSCU of the related network equipment

to determine if a HW failure occurred or if a cable is
disconnected or broken.
2. Verify if the LOSC alarm disappears.
3. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-9
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
OSCU board receives a supervision signal but cannot

decode it.
LOSCF alarm is raised by OTS block related to the
LOFA board associated with the of OSCU board.
Probable Cause
Remote WDM equipment does not send the compliant

supervision frame.
Related Alarms
one.
Corrective Actions
o.
Actions
1. Check the configuration of the 2 OSCU boards to

determine if the clock configuration is OK.
2. If the alarm persists, change the relevant OSCU
board.
3. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-10
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
Loss of a single wavelength related to express channel

at WMA input.
LOW alarm is raised by the OCH CTP block.
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
Transmitter of previous transmission device is in

failure, or
One express channel is not in service in the

network.
Configuration of express channel threshold is too

high.

impacted layers
Corrective Actions
o.
Actions
Perform one of the following:

1. Check previous WDM transmission devices until
you find the source of the alarm.
2. Verify the consistency between the board
configuration and the network.
3. Check if the input channel threshold is compliant.
4. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-11
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
Indicates a degradation of the transmission via high

correction rate (FEC).

is degraded.
Tuning discrepancy between transponders and

amplifiers following a modification of the number
of WDM channels.
The fiber path between the 1626 LM and the

previous transmission device may be degraded.

impacted layers
Corrective Actions
one.
Actions

2. Check the fiber between the 1626 LM and the
3. Measure the channel margin.
4. If necessary, tune the line to recover the channel
margin.
5. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-12
Transmission Alarms
otnTIM (Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier

Mismatch)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
otnTIM (Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch)

otnTIM (Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch)
Description
Indicates that the received TTI is not the expected one

from a remote equipment.
otnTIM alarm is raised by:
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
OTU/ODU blocks of TRBC or TRBD boards.
OTS block of LOFA boards, if supervision is

configured (OSCU board implemented and cabled
to LOFA boards)
Wrong TTI configuration.
The fiber plugged into TRBC, TRBD or LOFA

boards handles a signal which is not expected by the
related board.

impacted layers
Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. Verify if the local cabling is compliant with the

cabling plan.
2. Verify if the local ODU-TTI, OTU-TTI or OTS-TTI
configuration is compliant with the configuration
plan.
3. Check ODU-TTI, OTU-TTI or OTS-TTI on the
remote WDM equipment.
4. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-13
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
Transmission problems have occurred.

SSF alarm is relevant in the context of remote network
management. In such context, SSF alarm indicates the
operator that a primary transmission alarm has been
raised.
SSF alarm can be raised by:
In case of simultaneous lower layer alarms:
OMS, ODU, RS blocks.
In case of absence of lower layer alarms:
Probable Cause
OCHgdc block of ETHC and 2xGBE_FC boards,
RsTTP, RSgdc blocks of ETHC and 2xGBE_FC

boards.
The service related to the lower layer alarm is lost.

Related Alarms
The SDH frame is not correct or does not contain

GFP framing or
The VLA service which is terminated by the board

is faulty.
LOS, or
AIS, or
LOF, or
URU, or
LOMS, or
LOW, or
LOMF, or
TIM.
Corrective Actions
Refer to the lower layer alarms troubleshooting

description
Depends on the diagnostic.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-14
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Actions
Perform the necessary actions associated to the related

alarms.
Based on the probable cause described above, analyze

the SSF alarm context from the network manager.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-15
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
Raised in the context of OSCP protection, to report

that transmission problems have occurred on the client
network side.
SSF-i alarm is raised by OCPU board only.
Probable Cause
2 simultaneous SSF alarms have raised on both main

and spare boards.
Related Alarms

Corrective Actions
o.
Actions
Contact the relevant operation team to solve the

problem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-16
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SSF - e (Server Signal Failure-egress)
Description
Raised in the context of OSCP protection, to report

that transmission problems have occurred at the output
of WDM network.
SSF - e alarm is raised by OCPU board only.
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
Transmission problems have occurred at the interface of

WDM network.
SSF (at least on active transponder)
Transmission alarm(s) specific to the problem.
Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. Check the transmission alarm(s).

2. Depending on the transmission alarm, refer to
related corrective actions.
3. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-17
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
An alarm threshold has been reached or exceeded. As a

consequence, the PM-AS (Performance Monitoring Alarm Surveillance) icon color is changed
PM-AS alarm is raised by:
Rs-TM or OCHA blocks of TRBC or TRBD boards

or
RsTTP block from ETHC or 2xGE_FC boards.
Probable Cause
See Description.
Related Alarms
one.
Corrective Actions
o.
Actions
1. Analyze the relevant current and historical counters.

2. Check the previous transmission devices (client or
WDM) until you find the source of the alarm.
3. Perform the necessary actions to clear the alarm.
4. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-18
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
The received RS-TTI is not the expected one.

TIM alarm may be raised by:
Rs-TM block of TRBC or TRBD boards or
RsTTP block of Ethernet boards.
Probable Cause
Wrong configuration of RS section.
Related Alarms
one.
Corrective Actions
o.
Actions
For transponders:
1. Check if the current cabling is compliant with the
cabling plan.
2. Check the received RS-TTI of all previous boards or
nodes.
3. End.
For Ethernet boards:
1. Check the RS-TTI configured on the previous
remote Ethernet boards.
2. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-19
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
Indicates an important error rate during 10 consecutive

seconds.

is degraded.
Tuning discrepancy between transponders and

of WDM channels.

one.
Corrective Actions
o.
Actions
1. Analyze the signal degradation alarms of the

previous transmission devices.
2. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-20
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
Indicates that the FEC does not correct all the

transmission errors.

is degraded.
Tuning discrepancy between transponders an

of WDM channels.

one.
Corrective Actions
one.
Actions

2. Check the fiber between the 1626 LM and the
3. Measure the channel margin.
4. If necessary, tune the line to recover the channel
margin.
5. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-21
Transmission Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
Indicates that an E internal failure has occurred. Can

be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.
Probable Cause
See Description.
Related Alarms
SSF (Server Signal failure)
All Equipment alarms may potentially be raised.
Corrective Actions
Yes.
Actions
1. Check the related alarm(s).

2. Depending on the alarm, refer to related corrective
actions.
3. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
21-22
22
Processing Alarms
22
Overview
Purpose
This topic gives a description of the alarm raised when data are corrupted and the
required actions to perform to clear this alarm.
Contents
22-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
22-1
Processing Alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Probable Cause
Related Alarms
The MIB (Master Information Base) is corrupted.
The DB icon of the main window turns to color

orange.
Traffic is not affected but E alarms are not raised

anymore.
May be the result of several factors, including:
power outages,
interruptions or crashes during the writing of data
etc.

Corrective Actions
Actions
1. Restore a clean MIB (refer to Restoring the MIB

(p. 7-5).
2. From the main window, check if the DB icon has
been reset to non sever level.
3. If the problem persists, erase the MIB and the local
configuration (refer to Maintenance and Trouble
Clearing Guide, Database and Local Configuration
Maintenance chapter).
4. From the main window, check if the DB icon has
been reset to non severe level.
Support Team.
6. End.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
22-2
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AFI
Authority and Format Identifier

ALCT
Automatic Level ConTrol

ANTP
Alcatel etwork Time Protocol

APE
Automatic Power Equalization

APSD
Automatic Power Shutdown

APT
Amplifier Power Tuning

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BER
Bit Error Rate

BMDX
Band Multiplexer DemultipleXer

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CMDX
Channel Multiplexer DemultipleXer

CT
Craft Terminal
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DAPI
Destination Address Point Identifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
GL-1
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCC
Data Country Code

DSP
Domain Specific Part

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EOL
End Of Life
ESCT
Equipment and Shelf ConTroller

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FEC
Forward Error Correction

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GE_FC
Gigabit EThernet Fiber Channel

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IDI
Initial Domain Identifier

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LAPD
Link Acces Protocol - channel D

LM
Light Manager
LOFA
Line Optical Fiber Amplifier

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MIB
Management Information Base

MSP
Multiplex Section Protection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NSAP
etwork Service Access Point

NTP
etwork Time Protocol

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
GL-2
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCH
Optical Channel
OMDX
Optical Multiplexer DemultipleXer

OMSP
Optical Multiplex Section Protection

OND
Optical etwork Design Platform

OSC
Optical Supervisory Channel

OSI
Open System Interconnection

OSNCP
Optical Subetwork Connection Protection

OTS
Optical Transmission Section

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM
PSUP
Power SUPply
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R-OADM
Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer

Rx
Emission
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAPI
Source Address Point Identifier

SFP
Smal Form Factor Pluggable

SNCP
Subetwork Connection Protection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
GL-3
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TDMX
Tunable Demultiplexer
TMN
Telecommunication Management etwork

TR-OADM
Tunable and Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer

TRB
Tributary
Tx
Transmission
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VOA
Variable Optical Attenuation

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WDM
Wavelength Division Multiplexing

WMAN
Wavelength Manager
WSS
Wavelength Selective Switch

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
XFP
eXtended Form Factor Pluggable
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
GL-4
Index
A Access State, 4-5
Access State icons, 4-7

Addresses
Local area address parameters,
6-4
AIS, 21-2
Alarm Thresholds
Alarm Threshold Parameters,
19-24
Alarms
Alarm Management, 19-1
Alarm Thresholds, 19-23
Alarm Types, 19-4
Equipment Alarms, 20-1
Operation domain alarm
indicators, 3-28, 19-7
Processing Alarms, 22-1
Severity indicators, 3-26, 3-26,
19-5
Severity Profiles, 19-8
Transmission Alarms, 21-1
ASAP, 19-8
ASAP Management, 19-10
AUP, 20-3
.............................................................
Procedure, 16-8
Ethernet interface parameters,

6-7, 6-7
COCE, 20-4
Configuration
Event Logs, 16-7
Exportation, 18-2
Exportation
Exporting System
Configuration to XML File,
18-6
Configuration, 18-2
Exporting
Cabling Configuration, 13-6
Connectors, 13-1
Procedures, 13-2, 13-3
System Configuration (to XML

file), 18-6
Counters
Thresholds, 17-8
Craft Terminal, 2-2
.............................................................
G Graphical User Interface, 3-1
GUI, 3-1
Starting the Craft Terminal, 4-3
Starting the 1626 L GUI, 4-4
Cross Connection, 12-1

Parameters, 12-8
.............................................................
Type of cross connections,

12-3
H HT, 20-6
CSF, 21-3
CT, 2-2
.............................................................
D DB, 22-2
Domain alarm indicators, 3-28,

3-28, 19-7, 19-7
.............................................................
.............................................................
E EQPT, 20-5
Exporting to XML File, 13-6
Configuring Ethernet interface,

6-18
Channel Margin
B Board View, 3-7
C Cabling
Ethernet
Procedures, 13-4, 13-5, 13-6
Equipment View, 3-2
HVCSP, 20-7
.............................................................
I
Icons
Access State icons, 4-7
Indicators
Management status indicators,
3-29
IPD, 20-8
IPL, 20-9
.............................................................
L LA, 20-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
IN-1
Index
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LBER, 21-4
LOF, 21-5
LOMF, 21-6
LOMS, 21-7
Loopback, 14-1
LOS, 21-8
LOSC, 21-9
LOSCF, 21-10
LOW, 21-11
LTCER, 21-12
.............................................................
M Management
Craft Terminal, 2-2

Monitoring
Procedures, 16-2
.............................................................
N TP
Disabling TP, 6-16

Identifying a TP server, 6-15
TP server network address
parameters, 6-6
Recommended board locations,

15-10
Unitary Procedures /
WMA3x74, 10-15
.............................................................
Transmission View, 3-15
R R-OADM, 10-1
etwork Procedures /
WMA3x74, 10-9
WMA1100, 10-25
WMA3x74, 10-15
Remote Inventory, 18-2
Procedures, 18-3
P PD, 20-14
Performance Counters, 17-4

Performance Monitoring, 17-1
Mechanism, 17-7
PP, 20-15
Protection
Protection Parameters, 15-14
Protection Principles, 15-3
UEP, 20-24
URU, 21-22
.............................................................
V View
Equipment View, 3-2
RUTM, 20-18
RUU, 20-19
.............................................................
VM, 20-26
.............................................................
W WD, 20-27
S SCP, 20-20
Severity indicators, 3-26, 19-5

Severity Profiles, 19-8
SSF, 21-14
SSF-e, 21-17
Status indicators, 3-29
.............................................................
UE, 21-21
RUP, 20-17
O OCCO, 20-11
OPL, 20-13
UDCL, 20-25
Board View, 3-7
SSF-I, 21-16
OPD, 20-12
U UAT, 21-20
RUM, 20-16
.............................................................
ontTIM, 21-13
.............................................................
Supervision
Starting the 1626 LM
supervision, 4-4
.............................................................
T TCA, 21-18
TD, 20-21
TF, 20-22
TIM, 21-13, 21-19
TOOR, 20-23
TR-OADM, 10-1
etwork Procedures /
WMA3x74, 10-9
WMA1100, 10-25
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AL-75164-AAAA
IN-2

1626LM 5.0B User Provisioning Guide Ed02

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

1626LM 5.0B User Provisioning Guide Ed02

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Proprietary Use pursuant

Proprietary Use pursuant

About this document

How to use this document

Related documentation ........................................................................................................................................................ xxviii

Quality policy ............................................................................................................................................................................ xxix

How to comment ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxix

Discovering Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM

Before You Start With 1626 LM Management

Understanding the 1626 LM Management

Craft Terminal Hardware Requirements ............................................................................................................................ 2-3

Operation Graphical User Interface

The Board View Window ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-7

Describing the Permanent Displayed Areas

The Title Bar

The Menu Bar

Alarm Severity Indicators

Operation Domain Alarm Indicators

Management Status Indicators ............................................................................................................................................ 3-29

Search for Termination Point Input Window ................................................................................................................. 3-32

1626 LM Management Start Up

Managing the Access State

Software Download Management

Displaying Software Package Information ....................................................................................................................... 5-5

LAPD Parameters .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-10

Managing Communication and Routing

Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters ......................................................................................... 6-13

Configuring IP Static Routes ............................................................................................................................................... 6-19

Managing OSI over IP ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-23

Database Backup and Restore

Racks and Subracks Management

Displaying the Subrack View

Displaying the Board View

Setting a Rack In Service

Setting a Rack Out Of Service

Setting a Subrack In Service

Setting a Subrack Out Of Service ...................................................................................................................................... 8-16

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management

TRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features

Declaring Control and Service Boards

Declaring TRBD Boards ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-22

Declaring OMDX Boards ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-33

Declaring the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board

Declaring BOFA Amplifier Boards ................................................................................................................................... 9-40

Declaring TDMX 1180 boards

Declaring WMA 3x74 Boards

Board Configuration Parameters

Board Generic Configuration Parameters

Board Specific Configuration Parameters

Laser Power Configuration Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 9-62

LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters

LOFA11xx APSD Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 9-68

Configuring ETHC Working Mode

Managing ETHC Cross Connections

Configuring 2xGBE_FC Board Signal Type Transportation

Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters

Configuring TRBx Shutdown Criteria ............................................................................................................................. 9-83

Configuring the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX Board

Configuring ALCT Working Mode ................................................................................................................................... 9-88

Configuring TDMX 1180 Port Profile ............................................................................................................................. 9-91

Configuring WMA Provisioning Parameters

Configuring WMA 1100 Equalization Parameter .................................................................................................... 9-94

Setting a Board In Service .................................................................................................................................................... 9-97